JP2015164610A - Game machine - Google Patents

Abstract

PROBLEM TO BE SOLVED: To enhance player's interest in a notified period.SOLUTION: A game machine 1 notifies a certain period for achieving a prescribed task, and at a plurality of timings in the certain period, executes a success/failure presentation as to whether to achieve the prescribed task by executing a first presentation in which the prescribed task is achieved or a second presentation in which it is not achieved. At the same time, while the second presentation is being executed, a plurality of kinds of special presentations having different presentation periods are to be executed. When the special presentation is executed at a second timing that comes later than a first timing, the special presentation having a shorter presentation period is executed at a higher ratio than at the first timing.

Description

  The present invention relates to a gaming machine that performs variable display and can be controlled to an advantageous state advantageous to a player.

  As this type of gaming machine, a plurality of types of identification information is obtained when a game medium such as a game ball is launched into a game area by a launching device, and the game medium is won in a start prize area such as a prize opening provided in the game area. There are pachinko machines in which variable display is performed, and slot machines in which a predetermined number of bets are set and when a start operation is performed, a plurality of types of identification information are variably displayed.

  In such a gaming machine, as one of the effects, a predetermined period (for example, 20 variable display times) is informed beforehand as a mission period, and a specified variation pattern or effect is caused to appear within the predetermined period. Some issues (missions) are reported, and when winning within the mission period, a variation pattern reported as an issue (mission) occurs, and there is a case that a big hit is generated by successful mission (For example, refer to Patent Document 1).

JP 2006-55232 A

  However, Patent Document 1 has a problem that it is not possible to increase the player's interest.

  The present invention has been made paying attention to such problems, and an object thereof is to provide a gaming machine capable of increasing the interest of a player.

In order to solve the above-mentioned problem, a gaming machine according to claim 1 of the present invention provides:
A gaming machine that performs variable display and can be controlled to an advantageous state advantageous to the player,
Hold storage means capable of storing variable display that has not yet been started as hold information;
Determining means for determining whether to control to the advantageous state;
A determination unit that determines whether or not to be controlled to the advantageous state before determination by the determination unit;
Based on the determination by the determination unit, a notice effect for notifying that the variable state is controlled to the advantageous state in a plurality of variable displays before the variable display based on the hold information stored in the hold storage unit is executed. Notice execution execution means capable of executing,
Success / failure effect execution means capable of executing a success / failure effect on whether or not to be controlled to the advantageous state;
With
The notice effect executing means executes a first pattern for executing the first notice effect and a second notice effect having a higher ratio of being controlled to the advantageous state than the first notice effect in the variable display of the plurality of times. The notice effect can be executed by any one of the second pattern and the third pattern that executes the second notice effect after executing the first notice effect,
According to the production mode, the proportion of execution of the notice production varies depending on the third pattern.
According to this feature, the player's interest can be increased.

The gaming machine according to means 1 of the present invention is:
A gaming machine (pachinko gaming machine 1) capable of performing a predetermined game,
A predetermined period (for example, 60 seconds) for achieving a predetermined task is notified, and a first effect that achieves the predetermined task (for example, an effect that wins a battle) or the first task that does not achieve the predetermined task Execution of success / failure effect (battle effect) on whether or not to achieve the predetermined task by executing one of two effects (for example, an effect of drawing or defeating a battle) can be executed at a plurality of timings within the predetermined period. A success / failure effect execution means (for example, a portion where the effect control CPU 120 performs a mission effect to achieve a mission by winning in battles 1 to 3 in steps S170 to S171);
A special effect (for example, a revival effect) that achieves the predetermined task different from the first effect, and when the second effect is executed, a plurality of types of specials having different effect periods within the predetermined period Special effect execution means (for example, the effect control CPU 120 for performing the effect 1 in the step S170 to the step S171) can execute one special effect among the effects (for example, the revival effects 1 to 3) following the second effect. The part that implements the mission direction to achieve the mission by winning by resurrection after the draw or defeat in ~ 3),
With
The special effect execution means, when the execution timing of the special effect is a second timing (for example, the timing of battle 3) that is later than the first timing (for example, the timing of battle 1), than when it is the first timing. The special effect having a short effect period is executed at a higher rate (for example, at the timing of the battle 3 later than the battle 1, in the case of the battle 1, the revival effect 1 having a shorter effect period is determined than the rate P1). (Restoration effect 1 is determined at a high P3 rate)
It is characterized by that.
According to this feature, the player's interest in the notified fixed period can be increased.

The gaming machine of means 2 of the present invention is the gaming machine described in means 1,
The special effect (for example, the revival effect) includes a unique special effect (for example, the revival effect 3 that can be determined only at the timing of the battle 2) unique to at least one execution timing,
The special effect execution means can execute the specific special effect at an execution timing corresponding to the specific special effect when the specific special effect exists (for example, the effect control CPU 120 performs the effect of the battle 2). In the case where the effect of drawing is executed, if the fluctuation pattern of PMC-3 is determined, the revival effect 3 including the effect of the revival line B can be executed)
It is characterized by that.
According to this feature, depending on the execution timing, a unique special effect unique to the execution timing is executed, so that the interest of the effect can be improved.

The gaming machine of means 3 of the present invention is the gaming machine according to means 1 or means 2,
Achievement suggestion effect execution means (for example, the effect control CPU 120 for executing the effect suggestion effect (suggest effect in which the masked character appears)) suggesting whether or not the predetermined task is achieved within the predetermined period (for example, 1 minute). Is provided with a portion for executing the suggestion effect set in step S529 + in step S172),
When the achievement suggesting effect is executed by the achievement suggesting effect executing means, the special effect executing means is higher than a ratio of executing the special effect at one execution timing when the achievement suggesting effect is not executed. The special effect is executed at another timing different from the timing of 1 (for example, the effect control CPU 120 uses the suggestion effect execution determination table (with the revival effect) in step S529 + to suggest the effect). (Implementation / non-execution of the project)
It is characterized by that.
According to this feature, since the execution timing of the special effect varies depending on whether or not the achievement suggesting effect is performed, the player can be focused on whether or not the achievement suggesting effect is performed. Can be improved.

The gaming machine of means 4 of the present invention is the gaming machine according to any one of means 1 to means 3,
Whether or not a game value advantageous to the player (for example, a big hit state) is given, and any type of game value (for example, a probability change big hit that shifts to a probability change state, and a probability change) Provided with an assignment determining means (for example, a portion where the CPU 103 performs step S241) for determining whether to give a non-probable big hit that does not shift to a state;
In the special effect execution means, when the provision of the game value having a high advantage is determined by the provision determination means, the provision of the game value having a low advantage is determined by the provision determination means. The special effect is executed at a high rate (when the probability variation jackpot is determined, the CA5-3 variation pattern type including the variation pattern corresponding to the revival effect at a higher rate than when the non-probability variation jackpot is determined. Is determined using the jackpot variation pattern type determination table)
It is characterized by that.
According to this feature, when a special effect is executed, there is a high possibility that a game value having a high advantage is determined to be given. Since the player can be given a sense of expectation that a game value will be given, the interest of the gaming machine can be improved.

The gaming machine of means 5 of the present invention is the gaming machine according to any one of means 1 to means 4,
The special effect execution means may perform the special effect (for example, revival effect 1) having a short effect period with a longer effect time than a part of the special effect (for example, revival effect 1 (5 seconds)) having a long effect period. It is characterized in that it is executed by performing a long (20 seconds) revival effect 2 end 5 seconds portion).
According to this feature, since it is not necessary to individually store the short special effect data, the storage data capacity for the special effect can be reduced.

The gaming machine according to means 6 of the present invention is the gaming machine according to any one of means 1 to means 5,
Privilege grant determining means for determining whether or not to grant a privilege to the player (for example, a portion where the CPU 103 executes step S241);
Variable display means (for example, decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, 5R) for performing variable display of a plurality of types of identification information that can identify each of them,
Based on the determination result of the privilege grant determining means, the first specific effect (for example, the variable display and the variable display of the repetitive display as well as the variable display means) Production A1 (production A3, production C1-production C3) or specific production execution means capable of executing a second specific production (for example, stories B1 to B3) different from the first specific production (for example, in a big hit gaming state) An effect control CPU 120 for performing the effect based on a determination result such as whether or not to control,
Privilege suggestion effect execution means (for example, the effect control CPU 120 uses the suggestion effect A) to execute a privilege suggestion effect that suggests whether or not the privilege is granted based on the determination result of the privilege grant determination means. G part)
With
The privilege suggestion effect execution means can execute the privilege suggestion effect when the first specific effect is being executed, and executes the privilege suggestion effect when the second specific effect is being executed. It is impossible (for example, no suggestion effect is executed during the execution of stories B1 to B3)
Furthermore, it starts immediately after the end of execution of the second specific effect, rather than during the first period (for example, the super reach A or C, the execution period of the continuous effect A, etc.) that starts immediately after the execution of the first specific effect. The privilege suggesting effect is executed at a higher rate during the second period (for example, the execution period of Super Reach B).
According to this feature, the second period is more likely to give a sense of expectation that the privilege is granted than the first period, so even if the second specific effect is executed (that is, the suggestion effect is Even if there is a period that cannot be executed), for example, when the first specific effect is executed (when there is no period during which the privilege suggesting effect cannot be executed), the expectation can be expressed, so Can be reduced or prevented. Note that the privilege suggesting effect is executed at a higher rate during the second period starting immediately after the end of execution of the second specific effect than during the first period starting immediately after the execution of the first specific effect. For example, it means that the probability that the privilege suggestion effect is executed at least once is higher in the second period than in the first period.

A gaming machine according to means 7 of the present invention is the gaming machine according to any one of means 1 to 6,
Based on the establishment of the start condition (winning to the first start winning opening and the second starting winning opening), a variable display of a plurality of types of identification information that can identify each of them is performed, and a specific specified in advance as a display result A gaming machine (pachinko gaming machine 1) that controls a specific gaming state (for example, a big hit gaming state) advantageous to the player when a display result (for example, a big hit symbol) is derived,
With respect to variable display of identification information that has not yet been started, hold storage means (for example, first and second special figure hold storage unit 151A) that can store information for determining whether or not to obtain the specific display result as hold information 151B)
Based on the hold information read from the hold storage means when starting the variable display of the identification information, a start time determining means (for example, determining whether the variable display result of the identification information is the specific display result) CPU 103 executes the process of step S240),
Based on the determination result of the start time determining means, variable display executing means for executing variable display of identification information (for example, the portion in which the CPU 103 executes the processing of steps S112 and S113 after the processing of step S240 is executed) ,
Pre-start determination means for determining whether or not the specific display result is obtained based on the establishment of the start condition before determination by the start time determination means (for example, the CPU 103 determines a winning random number value determination process in step S212) Part to execute)
Based on the determination by the pre-start determination means, a notice for executing a continuous notice effect over a plurality of variable displays before the variable display based on the hold information stored in the hold storage means is executed. Effect execution means (for example, the part where the CPU 120 for effect control executes the process of step S603 based on the process of step S710);
Based on the determination result of the start time determining means, the display result suggesting effect executing means (for example, the CPU 120 for effect control) executes a display result suggesting effect (for example, a changing notice effect, etc.) that suggests the display result of the identification information. A portion for executing the process of step S172 based on the process of S529),
With
The notice effect execution means includes a pattern for executing the first notice effect (for example, prefetch notice pattern SYP1-1, SYP1-2, etc.) and the specific display result more than the first notice effect in the variable display of the plurality of times. A pattern for executing the second notice effect with a high ratio (for example, a prefetch notice pattern SYP2-1) and a pattern for executing the second notice effect after the first notice effect is executed (for example, the prefetch notice pattern SYP3- 1) and the like, and the notice effect can be executed in any of the patterns,
There are a plurality of presentation modes of the display result suggesting effect (for example, “notice X”, “notice Y”, “notice Z”, etc.)
The display result suggesting effect executing means performs the second notice effect in a pattern in which the second notice effect is executed after the first notice effect is executed by the notice effect executing means according to the effect form of the display result suggesting effect. The display result suggesting effect is executed so that the ratio to be executed is different (for example, in the case of the pre-reading notice pattern SYP3-1, it can be determined only for the changing notice pattern of "Notice Y").
It is characterized by that.
According to this feature, even when the first notice effect is started, a sense of expectation to shift to the second notice effect can be given by the effect form of the display result suggesting effect, and the interest of the game is improved. .

A gaming machine according to means 8 of the present invention is the gaming machine according to any one of means 1 to means 7,
Variable display means for deriving a display result by performing variable display of a plurality of types of identification information that can be distinguished from each other based on the establishment of a start condition (winning at the first start prize opening or the second start prize opening) (For example, when a specific display result (for example, jackpot symbol) predetermined as a display result of identification information is derived on the first and second special symbol display devices 4A and 4B), a specific gaming state ( For example, a gaming machine (pachinko gaming machine 1) controlled to a big hit gaming state,
For variable display of identification information that has not yet been started despite the start condition being satisfied, information for determining whether or not to make the specific display result is a predetermined upper limit storage number (for example, first and second special features). The holding storage means (for example, the first and second special figure holding storage units 151A and 151B) capable of storing as holding information within the range of the figure holding storage number “4”),
Based on the hold information read from the hold storage means when starting the variable display of the identification information, a start time determining means (for example, determining whether the variable display result of the identification information is the specific display result) CPU 103 executes the process of step S240),
Based on the determination result of the start time determining means, variable display executing means for executing variable display of identification information (for example, the portion in which the CPU 103 executes the processing of steps S112 and S113 after the processing of step S240 is executed) ,
Pre-start determination means for determining whether or not the specific display result is obtained based on the establishment of the start condition before determination by the start time determination means (for example, the CPU 103 determines a winning random number value determination process in step S212) Part to execute)
Based on the determination by the pre-start determination means, a notice for executing a continuous notice effect over a plurality of variable displays before the variable display based on the hold information stored in the hold storage means is executed. Production execution means (for example, the portion where the production control CPU 120 executes the process of step S603 based on the process of step S710),
The notice effect execution means includes:
In the plurality of variable displays, a pattern for executing the first notice effect (for example, a pre-read notice pattern SYP1-1 or SYP1-2) and a second notice having a higher ratio of the specific display result than the first notice effect. Either a pattern that executes an effect (for example, a prefetch notice pattern SYP2-1) or a pattern that executes the second notice effect after the first notice effect is executed (for example, a prefetch notice pattern SYP3-1) In addition to being able to execute the notice effect,
When the notice effect is executed in a pattern in which the second notice effect is executed after the first notice effect is executed, the plurality of timings during one variable display (for example, at the start of change or at the end of change) The second notice effect can be started, and the notice effect is executed so that the degree of advantage differs depending on the timing of starting the second notice effect (for example, the effect control CPU 120 varies in the process of step S752). Determine the change timing according to the category)
It is characterized by that.
According to this feature, even when the first notice effect is started, it is possible to give a sense of expectation to shift to the second notice effect depending on the effect mode, and pay attention to the start timing of the second notice effect. Can improve the interest of the game.

It is a front view which shows the pachinko game machine in an Example. It is a block diagram which shows the various control boards etc. which were mounted in the pachinko game machine. It is explanatory drawing which shows an example of the content of an effect control command. It is explanatory drawing which illustrates the random number for game counted on the main board side. It is a figure which illustrates a fluctuation pattern. It is a figure which shows the content of a mission effect. It is a figure which illustrates a variation pattern classification. It is a figure which shows the structural example of the big hit fluctuation pattern type determination table and the small hit fluctuation pattern type determination table. It is a figure which illustrates a mission variation pattern determination table. It is a figure explaining the establishment difference of a mission fluctuation pattern. It is a figure which shows the structural example of a big hit classification determination table. It is a block diagram which shows the structural example of the data holding area for game control. It is a figure which shows the structural example etc. of an effect control pattern. FIG. 40 is a block diagram showing a configuration example of an effect control data holding area. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the timer interruption process for game control. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a special symbol process process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a start winning determination process. It is the flowchart etc. which show an example of a random value determination process at the time of winning. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a special symbol normal process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a fluctuation pattern setting process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of production control main processing. It is explanatory drawing which illustrates the random number for game counted on the side of an effect control board. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the table for suggestion effect execution determination, and the table for suggestion effect type acquisition determination. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a command analysis process. It is a flowchart which shows production control process processing. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a prefetch notice determination process. It is a figure which shows the example of a setting of the ratio which determines prefetch notice effect. It is a figure which shows the list of chance eyes for continuous productions. It is a figure which shows the list of prefetch notice effect control patterns. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a variable display start setting process. It is a figure which shows the example of a setting of the ratio which determines the notice effect during a fluctuation | variation. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a prefetch notice execution setting process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of an suggestion effect setting process. It is a figure which shows the example of a display operation in an image display apparatus in case a prefetch notice effect is performed. It is a figure which shows the example of a display operation in an image display apparatus in case a prefetch notice effect is performed. FIG. It is a figure which shows the example of a display operation in an image display apparatus in case a prefetch notice effect is performed. It is a figure which shows the suggestion effect in a mission effect. It is a figure which shows the battle production in a mission production. It is a figure which shows the resurrection effect in a mission effect. It is a figure explaining each pseudo | simulation series and each super reach. It is a figure explaining the relationship between 1st privilege suggestion production period and privilege suggestion productions A to C. It is a figure explaining the relationship between the 2nd privilege suggestion production period and the privilege suggestion production D. FIG. It is a figure explaining the relationship between 3rd privilege suggestion production period and privilege suggestion productions E to G. It is the flowchart etc. which show an example of privilege suggestion effect determination processing. It is a figure which shows the execution decision example of a privilege suggestion effect. It is a figure which shows the example of determination of the execution pattern of privilege suggestion effects A to C. It is a figure which shows the example of determination of the execution pattern of privilege suggestion production D. It is a figure which shows the example of determination of the execution pattern of privilege suggestion effects E to G. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the production process during variable display. It is a figure which shows the example of a display image of production C1 to C3. It is a figure which shows the example of a display image of the super reach C. It is a figure which shows the example of a display image of stories B1 to B3. It is a figure which shows the example of a display image of super reach B. It is a figure which shows the example of a display image of various privilege suggestion effects. It is a front view of the slot machine which is the game machine of Example 2 to which this invention was applied. It is a block diagram which shows the structure of a slot machine. (A) is a follow figure which shows the process of a modification, (B) is a figure which shows the determination ratio which determines a change timing in step S752. It is a figure which shows a part of prefetch notice effect control pattern of a modification.

  A mode for carrying out a gaming machine according to the present invention will be described below based on examples.

  Hereinafter, an embodiment of the present invention will be described in detail with reference to the drawings. FIG. 1 is a front view of a pachinko gaming machine according to the present embodiment and shows an arrangement layout of main members. The pachinko gaming machine (gaming machine) 1 is roughly composed of a gaming board (gauge board) 2 constituting a gaming board surface and a gaming machine frame (base frame) 3 for supporting and fixing the gaming board 2. The game board 2 is formed with a substantially circular game area surrounded by guide rails. In this game area, a game ball as a game medium is launched from a predetermined hitting ball launching device and driven.

  A first special symbol display device 4A and a second special symbol display device 4B are provided at predetermined positions of the game board 2 (in the example shown in FIG. 1, on the right side of the game area). Each of the first special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol display device 4B is composed of, for example, 7-segment or dot matrix LEDs (light emitting diodes) and the like. Special symbols (also referred to as “special graphics”), which are a plurality of types of identification information (special identification information) that can be displayed, are variably displayed (variable display). For example, each of the first special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol display device 4B variably displays a plurality of types of special symbols composed of numbers indicating "0" to "9", symbols indicating "-", and the like. To do. The special symbols displayed on the first special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol display device 4B are limited to those composed of numbers indicating "0" to "9", symbols indicating "-", and the like. However, for example, a plurality of types of lighting patterns in which the combination of the LED to be turned on and the LED to be turned off in the 7-segment LED may be set in advance as a plurality of types of special symbols.

  A plurality of special symbols are assigned symbol numbers corresponding thereto. As an example, symbol numbers “0” to “9” are assigned to numbers indicating “0” to “9”, and symbol numbers “10” are assigned to symbols indicating “−”. Just do it. Hereinafter, the special symbol variably displayed on the first special symbol display device 4A is also referred to as "first special symbol", and the special symbol variably displayed on the second special symbol display device 4B is also referred to as "second special symbol". .

  Both the first special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol display device 4B are formed, for example, in a square shape. Note that the type of the first special figure and the type of the second special figure may be the same (for example, a number indicating “0” to “9” and a symbol indicating “−”), and the type may be different. May be different. Further, each of the first special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol display device 4B may be configured to variably display numbers (or two-digit symbols) indicating, for example, “00” to “99”. .

  An image display device 5 is provided near the center of the game area on the game board 2. The image display device 5 is composed of, for example, an LCD (liquid crystal display device) or the like, and forms a display area for displaying various effect images. In the display area of the image display device 5, the first special symbol variable display by the first special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol variable display by the second special symbol display device 4B in the special symbol game respectively correspond to the variable display. For example, in a decorative symbol display area serving as a plurality of variable display units such as three, decorative symbols that are a plurality of types of identification information (decorative identification information) that can be identified are variably displayed. This variable display of decorative designs is also included in the variable display game.

  As an example, “left”, “middle”, and “right” decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R are arranged in the display area of the image display device 5. And in response to the start of one of the changes in the first special symbol in the first special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol in the second special symbol display device 4B in the special symbol game, In the “left”, “middle”, and “right” decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R, the variation of decorative symbols (for example, vertical scroll display) is started. Thereafter, when the fixed special symbol is stopped and displayed as a variable display result in the special symbol game, the “left”, “middle”, and “right” decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R in the image display device 5 are displayed. Then, the finalized decorative symbol (final stop symbol) that is the variable display result of the decorative symbol is stopped and displayed.

  As described above, in the display area of the image display device 5, a special game using the first special graphic in the first special symbol display device 4A or a special graphic using the second special graphic in the second special symbol display device 4B is used. In synchronism with the figure game, variable display of a plurality of types of decorative symbols that can be identified is performed, and a definite decorative symbol that is a variable display result is derived and displayed (or simply referred to as “derivation”). In addition, for example, deriving and displaying various display symbols such as a special symbol and a decorative symbol means that identification information such as a decorative symbol is stopped and displayed (also referred to as a complete stop display or a final stop display) and the variable display is ended. . On the other hand, during the variable display from the start of the variable display of the decorative pattern until the fixed decorative pattern that is the variable display result is derived and displayed, the variation speed of the decorative pattern becomes “0”, The symbol may be displayed in a stationary state, for example, in a display state that causes slight shaking or expansion / contraction. Such a display state is also called a temporary stop display, and although the display result in the variable display is not displayed deterministically, the player can recognize that the variation of the decorative pattern due to the scroll display or the update display is not progressing. It becomes. The temporary stop display may include displaying the decorative symbols completely stopped for a time shorter than a predetermined time (for example, 1 second) without causing slight shaking or expansion / contraction.

  The decorative symbols variably displayed in the “left”, “middle”, and “right” decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R include, for example, eight types of symbols (alphanumeric characters “1” to “8” or Chinese characters). It may be any combination of numbers, English letters, eight character images related to a predetermined motif, a combination of numbers, letters, symbols, and character images. Character images may be, for example, people, animals, other objects, or , A decorative image showing a symbol such as a character or other arbitrary figure). A corresponding symbol number is assigned to each of the decorative symbols. For example, symbol numbers “1” to “8” are assigned to alphanumeric characters indicating “1” to “8”, respectively. Note that the number of decorative symbols is not limited to eight, and may be any number as long as an appropriate number of combinations such as a jackpot combination or a combination that is lost can be configured (for example, seven types or nine types).

  After the decorative symbol variable display is started, the “left”, “middle”, and “right” decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R are displayed until the fixed decorative symbol that is the variable display result is derived and displayed. In FIG. 5, for example, scroll display is performed such that the symbol number sequentially flows from the top to the bottom from the smallest to the largest, and when the decorative symbol having the largest symbol number (for example, “8”) is displayed, The decorative symbol having the smallest symbol number (for example, “1”) is displayed. Alternatively, in at least one of the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R (for example, the “left” decorative symbol display area 5L), the symbols are scrolled from the largest symbol number to the smallest symbol symbol. When the decorative design having the smallest number is displayed, the decorative design having the largest design number may be displayed.

  In the display area of the image display device 5, a start winning storage display area 5H is arranged. In the start winning memory display area 5H, a hold memory display for displaying the variable display hold number corresponding to the special figure game (special figure hold memory number) is specified. Here, the variable display suspension corresponding to the special game is that the game ball passes through the first start winning opening formed by the normal winning ball apparatus 6A and the second starting winning opening formed by the normal variable winning ball apparatus 6B. Generated based on the start winning by entering (entering). That is, the start condition (also referred to as “execution condition”) for executing a variable display game such as a special figure game or a variable display of decorative symbols has been established, but a variable display game based on the previously established start condition is being executed. When the start condition that allows the start of the variable display game is not satisfied due to the fact that the pachinko gaming machine 1 is controlled to the big hit gaming state, the variable display corresponding to the established start condition is suspended. Done. The on-hold storage display in the start winning memory display area 5H is generated based on a start winning by passing (entering) the game ball through the first start winning port, or the game ball passes through the second start winning port. The display mode (for example, display color and shape) is varied depending on whether the start is based on (entering) or not. In this embodiment, the reserved memory display generated based on the start winning when the game ball passes (enters) the first start winning opening is a round white display, and the game ball passes through the second starting winning opening. The on-hold storage display generated based on the start winning due to (entering) is a round white display. Note that, based on the start storage prize generated based on the start winning when the game ball passes (enters) through the first start winning opening, and based on the start winning when the game ball passes (enters) through the second start winning opening. The display mode of the hold storage display generated in this way may be different.

  In the example shown in FIG. 1, together with the start winning memory display area 5H, the first hold for displaying the special figure hold memory number in an identifiable manner on the upper part of the first special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol display device 4B. A display 25A and a second hold display 25B are provided. The first hold indicator 25A displays the first special figure hold memory number so that it can be specified. The second hold indicator 25B displays the second special figure hold memory number so that it can be specified. The number of first special figure hold memory is the number of memory in which the execution of the special figure game using the first special figure is suspended. The second special figure hold memory number is the number of memories in which the execution of the special figure game using the second special figure is suspended. The variable display hold memory number obtained by adding the first special figure hold memory number and the second special figure hold memory number is also referred to as a total hold memory number. When simply referring to the “number of special figure hold memory”, it usually refers to a concept including any of the first special figure hold memory number, the second special figure hold memory number, and the total hold memory number. It may refer to a concept that includes the first special figure reserved memory number and the second special figure reserved memory number but excludes the total reserved memory number).

  Below the image display device 5, an ordinary winning ball device 6A and an ordinary variable winning ball device 6B are provided. The normal winning ball device 6A forms a first starting winning opening as a starting area (first starting area) that is always kept in a constant open state by a predetermined ball receiving member, for example. The normal variable winning ball apparatus 6B has an electric motor having a pair of movable wing pieces that are changed into a normal open state as a vertical position and an expanded open state as a tilt position by a solenoid 81 for a normal electric accessory shown in FIG. A tulip-shaped accessory (ordinary electric accessory) is provided, and a start area (second start area) and a second start winning opening are formed.

  As an example, in the normally variable winning ball apparatus 6B, the movable wing piece is in the vertical position when the solenoid 81 for the normal electric accessory is in the OFF state, so that the game ball passes (enters) the second starting winning opening. It is difficult to open normally. On the other hand, in the normal variable winning ball apparatus 6B, the game ball passes through the second start winning opening by the tilt control in which the movable blade piece is tilted when the solenoid 81 for the normal electric accessory is in the ON state ( It will be in an expanded open state that is easy to enter. In the normal variable winning ball apparatus 6B, although the game ball can enter the second start winning opening even in the normal open state, there is a possibility that the game ball may enter more than in the expanded open state. You may comprise so that it may become low. Alternatively, the normally variable winning ball apparatus 6B may be configured such that the game ball does not enter the second starting winning opening in the normally open state, for example, by closing the second starting winning opening. In this way, the second start winning port as the second start area is in an expanded open state in which game balls easily pass (enter) and in a normally open state in which game balls are difficult to pass (enter) or cannot pass (enter). To change.

  A game ball that has passed (entered) the first start winning opening formed in the normal winning ball apparatus 6A is detected by, for example, a first start opening switch 22A shown in FIG. The game ball that has passed (entered) the second start winning opening formed in the normal variable winning ball apparatus 6B is detected by, for example, the second start opening switch 22B shown in FIG. Based on the detection of the game ball by the first start port switch 22A, a predetermined number (for example, three) of game balls are paid out as prize balls, and the first special figure holding memory number is set to a predetermined upper limit value (for example, “ 4 ") If the following, the first start condition is satisfied. Based on the detection of the game ball by the second start port switch 22B, a predetermined number (for example, three) of game balls are paid out as prize balls, and the second special figure holding memory number is set to a predetermined upper limit value (for example, “ 4 ") If the following, the second start condition is satisfied. The number of prize balls to be paid out based on the detection of the game ball by the first start port switch 22A and the number of prize balls to be paid out based on the detection of the game ball by the second start port switch 22B. May be the same number or different numbers.

  A special variable winning ball device 7 is provided below the normal winning ball device 6A and the normal variable winning ball device 6B. The special variable winning ball apparatus 7 includes a special winning opening door that is opened and closed by a solenoid 82 for the special winning opening door shown in FIG. 2, and the specific region that changes between an open state and a closed state by the special winning opening door. As a big prize opening.

  As an example, in the special variable winning ball apparatus 7, when the solenoid 82 for the special prize opening door is in the OFF state, the special prize opening door closes the big winning prize opening, and the game ball passes (enters) the big winning prize opening. Make it impossible. On the other hand, in the special variable winning ball apparatus 7, when the solenoid 82 for the big prize opening door is in the ON state, the big winning opening door opens the big winning opening and the game ball passes through the big winning opening (entrance). ) Make it easier. In this way, the special winning opening as a specific area changes into an open state in which a game ball easily passes (enters) and is advantageous to the player, and a closed state in which the game ball cannot pass (enters) and is disadvantageous to the player To do. Instead of the closed state where the game ball cannot pass (enter) through the big prize opening, or in addition to the closed state, a partially opened state where the game ball hardly passes (enters) through the big prize port may be provided.

  The game ball that has passed (entered) through the big prize opening is detected by, for example, the count switch 23 shown in FIG. Based on the detection of game balls by the count switch 23, a predetermined number (for example, 15) of game balls are paid out as prize balls. In this way, when the game ball passes (enters) through the large winning opening opened in the special variable winning ball apparatus 7, the gaming ball passes through other winning openings such as the first starting winning opening and the second starting winning opening, for example. More prize balls are paid out than when passing (entering). Therefore, if the special prize winning ball device 7 is in the open state, the game ball can enter the special prize winning opening, which is a first state advantageous to the player. On the other hand, when the special prize winning device 7 is closed in the special variable prize winning ball device 7, it becomes impossible or difficult for the player to get a prize ball by passing (entering) the gaming ball into the special prize winning port. This is a disadvantageous second state.

  A normal symbol display 20 is provided at a predetermined position of the game board 2 (on the left side of the game area in the example shown in FIG. 1). As an example, the normal symbol display 20 is composed of 7 segments, dot matrix LEDs, and the like, like the first special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol display device 4B, and a plurality of types of identification information different from the special symbols. Is displayed (variably displayed) in a variable manner. Such variable display of normal symbols is called a general game (also referred to as “normal game”).

  Above the normal symbol display 20, a universal figure holding display 25 </ b> C is provided. The general-purpose hold indicator 25C includes, for example, four LEDs, and displays the general-purpose hold storage number as the number of effective passing balls that have passed through the passing gate 41.

  In addition to the above-described configuration, the surface of the game board 2 is provided with a windmill for changing the flow direction and speed of the game ball and a number of obstacle nails. In addition, as a winning opening different from the first starting winning opening, the second starting winning opening, and the large winning opening, for example, a single or plural general winning openings that are always kept in a certain open state by a predetermined ball receiving member are provided. May be. In this case, a predetermined number (for example, 10) of game balls may be paid out as a prize ball based on the fact that a game ball that has entered one of the general prize openings is detected by a predetermined general prize ball switch. In the lowermost part of the game area, there is provided an out port through which game balls that have not entered any winning port are taken.

  Speakers 8L and 8R for reproducing and outputting sound effects and the like are provided at the left and right upper positions of the gaming machine frame 3, and a game effect lamp 9 is provided at the periphery of the game area. A decorative LED may be arranged around each structure (for example, the normal winning ball device 6A, the normal variable winning ball device 6B, the special variable winning ball device 7, etc.) in the game area of the pachinko gaming machine 1. At the lower right position of the gaming machine frame 3, there is provided a hitting operation handle (operation knob) operated by a player or the like to launch a game ball as a game medium toward the game area. For example, the hitting operation handle adjusts the resilience of the game ball according to the operation amount (rotation amount) by the player or the like. The hitting operation handle only needs to be provided with a single shot switch or a touch ring (touch sensor) for stopping the driving of a shooting motor included in the hitting ball shooting device.

  At a predetermined position of the gaming machine frame 3 below the gaming area, a game ball paid out as a prize ball or a game ball lent out by a predetermined ball lending machine is held (stored) so as to be supplied to a ball hitting device. )) Is provided. Below the gaming machine frame 3, there is provided a lower plate that holds (stores) surplus balls overflowing from the upper plate so as to be discharged to the outside of the pachinko gaming machine 1.

  For example, a stick controller 31A that can be held and tilted by the player is attached to a member that forms the lower plate, for example, at a predetermined position on the front side of the upper surface of the lower plate main body (for example, a central portion of the lower plate). Yes. The stick controller 31A includes an operation stick that the player holds, and a trigger button is provided at a predetermined position of the operation stick (for example, a position where the index finger of the operator is hooked when the player holds the operation stick). Yes. The trigger button can be operated in a predetermined direction by performing a push-pull operation with a predetermined operation finger (for example, an index finger) in a state where the player holds the operation stick of the stick controller 31A with an operation hand (for example, the left hand). What is necessary is just to be comprised. A trigger sensor that detects a predetermined instruction operation such as a push / pull operation on the trigger button may be incorporated in the operation rod.

  A tilt direction sensor unit for detecting a tilting operation with respect to the operating rod may be provided inside the main body of the lower plate below the stick controller 31A. For example, the tilt direction sensor unit includes two transmissive photosensors (parallel sensors) arranged in parallel to the board surface of the game board 2 on the left side of the center position of the operation pole when viewed from the player side facing the pachinko gaming machine 1. And a pair of transmissive photosensors (vertical sensor pairs) arranged perpendicularly to the surface of the game board 2 on the right side of the center position of the operation rod when viewed from the player side. What is necessary is just to be comprised including the photo sensor.

  The member that forms the upper plate includes, for example, a push button 31B that allows a player to perform a predetermined instruction operation by a pressing operation or the like at a predetermined position on the front side of the upper surface of the upper plate body (for example, above the stick controller 31A). Is provided. The push button 31B only needs to be configured to be able to detect a predetermined instruction operation such as a pressing operation from a player mechanically, electrically, or electromagnetically. A push sensor for detecting the player's operation act on the push button 31B may be provided inside the main body of the upper plate at the installation position of the push button 31B.

  Next, the progress of the game in the pachinko gaming machine 1 will be schematically described.

  In the pachinko gaming machine 1, the normal symbol display 20 performs variable display of the normal symbol such that the game ball that has passed through the passing gate 41 provided in the gaming area is detected by the gate switch 21 shown in FIG. For example, the normal symbol display 20 is set based on the fact that the normal symbol start condition for starting variable display of the normal symbol, such as the end of the previous general symbol game, is satisfied after the general symbol start condition for the normal symbol start is satisfied. The usual game is started.

  In this normal game, after the normal symbol change is started, when a predetermined time as the normal symbol change time elapses, the fixed normal symbol that is a variable display result of the normal symbol is stopped and displayed (derived display). At this time, if a specific normal symbol (a symbol per ordinary symbol), such as a number indicating “7”, is stopped and displayed as the fixed ordinary symbol, the variable symbol display result of the ordinary symbol becomes “per ordinary symbol”. On the other hand, if a normal symbol other than the symbol per symbol such as a number or symbol other than the number indicating “7” is stopped and displayed as the fixed ordinary symbol, the variable symbol display result of the normal symbol is “ordinary loss”. Become. Corresponding to the fact that the normal symbol variable display result is “per standard”, the expansion / release control (tilt control) is performed in which the movable tulip of the electric tulip constituting the normal variable winning ball apparatus 6B is tilted. The normal opening control is performed to return to the vertical position when a predetermined time has elapsed.

  After the first start condition is satisfied, for example, when the game ball that has passed (entered) the first start winning opening formed in the normal winning ball apparatus 6A is detected by the first start opening switch 22A shown in FIG. Based on the fact that the first start condition is satisfied, for example, because the previous special figure game or the big hit gaming state has ended, the special figure game by the first special symbol display device 4A is started. Further, the second starting condition is satisfied, for example, when a game ball that has passed (entered) the second starting winning opening formed in the normally variable winning ball apparatus 6B is detected by the second starting opening switch 22B shown in FIG. Later, a special game by the second special symbol display device 4B is started based on the fact that the second start condition is satisfied, for example, due to the end of the previous special game or the big hit gaming state.

  In the special symbol game by the first special symbol display device 4A or the second special symbol display device 4B, after the variable symbol display time as the special symbol variable time has elapsed after the variable symbol special display is started, the variable symbol variable symbol is displayed. The resulting definite special symbol (special diagram display result) is derived and displayed. At this time, if a specific special symbol (big hit symbol) is stopped and displayed as a confirmed special symbol, it becomes a “big hit” as the specific display result, and a predetermined special symbol (small bonus symbol) different from the big hit symbol is stopped and displayed. Then, it becomes “small hit” as a predetermined display result. Further, if a special symbol different from the big hit symbol or the small hit symbol is stopped and displayed as the confirmed special symbol, the game is “lost”.

  After the variable display result in the special figure game becomes “big hit”, the game is controlled to the big hit gaming state as a specific gaming state in which a round advantageous to the player (also referred to as “round game”) is executed a predetermined number of times. After the variable display result in the special figure game becomes “small hit”, the small hit game state is controlled as a special game state different from the big hit game state.

  In the pachinko gaming machine 1 in this embodiment, as an example, the special symbol indicating the numbers “3”, “5”, and “7” is the big hit symbol, and the special symbol indicating the number “2” is the small hit symbol. , The special symbol indicating the symbol “−” is a lost symbol. It should be noted that each symbol such as a big win symbol, a small bonus symbol, or a lose symbol in the special symbol game by the first special symbol display device 4A is different from each symbol in the special symbol game by the second special symbol display device 4B. Alternatively, a special symbol common to both special symbol games may be a big hit symbol, a small bonus symbol, or a lost symbol.

  After the jackpot symbol is stopped and displayed as a specific symbol in the special game, and the result of the specific display is “big hit”, the big winning door of the special variable winning ball device 7 is in a predetermined upper limit time in the big hit gaming state. The large winning opening is opened in a period until (for example, 29 seconds or 0.1 second) elapses or a period until a predetermined number (for example, 9) of winning balls are generated. Thereby, the round which makes the special variable winning ball apparatus 7 the 1st state (open state) advantageous for a player is performed.

  A special prize-winning ball device that receives a game ball falling on the surface of the game board 2 and then closes the big prize-winning slot, with the grand prize-winning door that has opened the grand prize-winning port during the round. 7 is changed to the second state (closed state) disadvantageous to the player, and one round is completed. The round that is the opening cycle of the big prize opening can be repeatedly executed until the number of executions reaches a predetermined upper limit number (for example, “15” or the like). Even before the number of rounds has reached the upper limit, the execution of the round may be terminated when a predetermined condition is satisfied (for example, a game ball has not won a big prize opening). .

  Of the rounds in the big hit gaming state, the round in which the upper limit time for which the special variable winning ball apparatus 7 is in the first state (open state) advantageous for the player is relatively long (for example, 29 seconds) is normally opened. Also called round. On the other hand, a round in which the upper limit time during which the special variable winning ball apparatus 7 is in the first state (open state) is relatively short (for example, 0.1 seconds) is also referred to as a short-term open round.

  Of the special symbols showing the numbers "3", "5", and "7" that are jackpot symbols, the special symbols showing the numbers "3" and "7" are normally open round jackpot symbols and the number "5" The special symbol indicating is a short-term open round jackpot symbol. In the big hit game state (normal open big hit state) as the normal open round specific game state controlled after the normal open round big hit symbol is derived as the fixed special symbol in the special figure game, the big winning opening of the special variable winning ball apparatus 7 The door is in the open state in a period until a predetermined upper limit time (for example, 29 seconds) that is the first period elapses or until a predetermined number (for example, 9) of winning balls are generated. By doing so, the round which changes the special variable winning ball apparatus 7 to the 1st state (open state) advantageous to a player is performed. The normal open big hit state is also referred to as a first specific game state.

  In the big hit game state (short-term open big hit state) as the short-term open round specific game state controlled after the short-term open round big hit symbol is derived as the final special symbol in the special figure game, the special variable winning ball apparatus 7 is set in each round. A second time period (for example, 0) that the upper limit time for changing to the first state advantageous to the player (the upper limit of the period during which the big prize opening is opened by the big prize opening door) is shorter than the first period in the normal opening big hit state. 1 second). Note that in the short-term open big hit state, it is only necessary to control the opening period of the big prize opening to be the second period, and other control may be performed in the same manner as the normal open big hit state. Alternatively, in the short-term open big hit state, the number of rounds may be set to a second round number (eg, “2”) that is smaller than the first round number (eg, “15”) in the normal open big hit state.

  In such a short-term open big hit state, a predetermined number (for example, 15 balls) of balls (prize balls) can be obtained if a game ball wins a big winning opening. However, the opening period of the special winning opening is the second period (such as 0.1 second) and is very short. For this reason, the short-term open big hit state is a big hit gaming state in which a ball (prize ball) cannot be obtained substantially. The short-term open big hit state is also called a second specific game state.

  In addition, the jackpot gaming state as the short-term opening round specific gaming state is not limited to the one with a short winning opening period compared to the big hit gaming state as the normal opening round specific gaming state, for example, the opening of the big winning mouth The period (upper limit time) is the same in the short-term open round specific game state and the normal open round specific game state, but in the short-term open round specific game state, there is an upper limit number of times (for example, two times) that makes the big prize opening state open. It may be less than the upper limit number of times (for example, 15 times) in the normal open round specific game state. That is, in the big hit gaming state as the short-term opening round specific gaming state, the period during which the game ball is changed to the first state in which the game ball easily passes (enters) in each round is longer than the first period in the normal opening round specific gaming state. As long as it is at least one of the short second period and the number of executions of the round being the second round number less than the first round number in the normal open round specific gaming state. .

  After the special symbol indicating the number “2” as the small hit symbol is derived as the confirmed special symbol in the special symbol game, the small hit gaming state as the special gaming state is controlled. In this small hit game state, similarly to the short-term open big hit state, the special variable winning ball apparatus 7 performs a variable winning operation for changing the big winning opening to the first state (open state) advantageous to the player. That is, in the small hit gaming state, for example, the operation of setting the special variable winning ball device 7 to the first state (open state) over the second period is repeatedly executed.

  In the “left”, “middle”, and “right” decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R provided in the image display device 5, a special symbol game using the first special symbol in the first special symbol display device 4A and In response to the start of any one of the special symbol games using the second special symbol in the second special symbol display device 4B, the decorative symbol variable display is started. The period from the start of variable display of decorative symbols to the end of variable display due to the stop display of the fixed decorative symbols in the “left”, “middle”, and “right” decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R Then, the variable display state of the decorative pattern may be a predetermined reach state.

  Here, the reach state means a decorative symbol (“reach variation symbol” which has not been stopped yet when the decorative symbol stopped and displayed in the display area of the image display device 5 forms part of the jackpot combination. Is also a display state in which the variation continues, or a display state in which all or part of the decorative symbols change synchronously while constituting all or part of the jackpot combination. Specifically, in some of the “left”, “middle”, and “right” decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R (for example, “left” and “right” decorative symbol display areas 5L and 5R) in advance. The remaining decorative symbol display area (for example, “medium”) that has not yet been stopped when the decorative symbol (for example, the decorative symbol indicating the alphanumeric character “7”) that constitutes the determined jackpot combination is stopped. In the symbol display area 5C, etc., the decorative pattern is changing, or in all or part of the “left”, “middle”, and “right” decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R. This is a display state that changes in synchronization while constituting all or part of the combination.

  Further, in response to the reach state, the variation speed of the decorative design is reduced, or a character image (an effect image simulating a person) different from the decorative design is displayed in the display area of the image display device 5. Or changing the display mode of the background image, playing and displaying a moving image that is different from the decorative design, or changing the variation mode of the decorative design, performing a different rendering operation than before reaching the reach state May be. Such effect operations such as display of the character image, change of the display mode of the background image, reproduction display of the moving image, and change of the decorative pattern change mode are referred to as reach effect display (or simply reach effect). In the reach effect, not only the display operation in the image display device 5 but also the sound output operation by the speakers 8L and 8R, the lighting operation (flashing operation) in the light emitter such as the game effect lamp 9, and the like are in the reach state. An operation mode different from the previous operation mode may be included.

  As an effect operation in the reach effect, a plurality of types of effect patterns (also referred to as “reach patterns”) having different operation modes (reach modes) may be prepared in advance. Each reach mode has a different possibility of “big hit” (also referred to as “reliability” or “big hit reliability”). That is, it is possible to vary the possibility that the variable display result will be a “hit” depending on which of the multiple types of reach effects is executed.

  As an example, in this embodiment, reach modes such as normal reach, super reach α, and super reach β are preset. And, when the reach form of super reach such as super reach α and super reach β appears, the possibility that the variable display result will be “big hit” compared to the case where the reach form of normal reach appears (expected degree of big hit) Becomes higher.

  During the variable display of decorative designs, unlike reach production, the variable display status of decorative designs may become reach status, and the variable display result may be a `` big hit '', etc. There may be a case where a variable display effect for informing the player is given in accordance with a variable display mode of the decorative design. Variable display effects such as “slip” and “pseudo-run” can be executed. It is only necessary to determine whether or not the “sliding” and “pseudo-continuous” variable display effects should be executed in response to the change pattern being determined on the main board 11 side. Whether or not the variable display effect of “slip” is to be executed on the side of the effect control board 12 may be determined regardless of the variation pattern determined on the side of the main board 11.

  In the variable display effect of “slip”, the decorative symbols are changed in all of the “left”, “middle”, and “right” decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R, and then a plurality of decorative symbol display areas (for example, After the decorative symbols are temporarily stopped and displayed in the “left” and “right” decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5R, etc., a predetermined number (for example, “1” or “2” of the temporarily stopped display of decorative symbols is displayed. )) In the decorative symbol display area (for example, one or both of the “left” decorative symbol display area 5L and the “right” decorative symbol display area 5R), and then the display is stopped and displayed again. An effect display for changing the decorative design to be stopped is performed. Thus, in the variable display effect of “slip”, a predetermined number of decorative symbols are displayed after temporary display of a plurality of decorative symbols from the start of variable display of decorative symbols to the display of a definite decorative symbol resulting in variable display. When the variable display state of the decorative pattern is re-executed, the variable display state of the decorative pattern becomes the reach state, and when the decorative symbol constituting the non-reach combination is stopped and displayed without reaching the reach state. is there.

  In the “pseudo-ream” variable display effect, the variable display of the decorative symbol is started in response to one of the first start condition and the second start condition of the special figure game being satisfied once. Before the final determined decorative symbol is derived and displayed, the decorative symbols are temporarily stopped and displayed in all of the “left”, “middle”, and “right” decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R. The effect display in which the decorative symbols are changed again (pseudo-variable) in all the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R can be performed a predetermined number of times (for example, up to three times). The number of quasi-continuous fluctuations is displayed for the left, middle, and right decorative symbols, excluding the first variation after all decorative symbols are temporarily suspended after the decorative symbol variable display starts. This is the number of times that the decorative symbols re-variate in all of the areas 5L, 5C, and 5R.

  In the “pseudo-continuous” variable display effect, for example, one of a plurality of types of pseudo-ream chances determined in advance in the “left”, “middle” and “right” decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C and 5R Are temporarily stopped and displayed as a predetermined display result. Thereafter, pseudo continuous variation (re-variable display) is performed. In this embodiment, in the variable display effect of “pseudo-continuous”, the first start condition or the second start condition is satisfied once by performing the pseudo-continuous change (re-change) once to three times. Based on this, it is possible to make it appear as if the variable display of the decorative symbols has been started 2 to 4 times in succession. Note that the number of pseudo-continuous fluctuations (re-variations) in the “pseudo-continuous” variable display effect may be executed more than one to three times, for example, four or five times.

  In addition to “slip” and “pseudo ream”, variable display effects using the variable display operation of such decorative patterns include, for example, “Development chance eyes”, “Development chance eyes end”, “Slip after chance eyes stop” Various production operations such as these may be executed. Here, in the variable display effect of “Development Opportunity”, “Left”, “Middle”, “Right” from the start of the variable display of the decorative pattern to the display of the fixed decorative pattern resulting in the variable display result. In all of the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R, the decorative symbols constituting the development chances included in the predetermined special combination are temporarily stopped and displayed, and then the decorative symbol variable display state is reached. A predetermined reach production is started. As a result, when the decorative symbol constituting the development opportunity is temporarily stopped, the variable display state of the decorative symbol becomes the reach state, and the variable display result becomes “big hit” after the reach state is reached. Expectation is enhanced.

  Further, in the variable display effect of “end of development chance”, after the decorative display variable display is started, the “left”, “middle”, and “right” decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R are all displayed. Then, an effect display is performed in which a decorative pattern having a predetermined combination as an opportunity for development is derived and displayed as a confirmed decorative pattern. In the variable display effect of “slip after the chance stop”, as with the variable display effect of “pseudo ream”, after the variable display of the decorative pattern is started, the fixed decorative pattern that is the variable display result is derived and displayed. After temporarily displaying the decorative symbols of the lost combinations (special combinations) that are the pseudo-continuous chances in all of the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R of “left”, “middle”, and “right”, Unlike the “pseudo-ream” variable display effect that changes the decorative symbols again in all of the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R, the decorative symbols are changed again in some of the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R. By doing so, an effect display for changing the decorative design to be stopped is performed.

  During variable display of decorative designs, unlike reach display or variable display effects such as “sliding” and “pseudo-continuous”, for example, a predetermined effect image is displayed, a message is displayed as an image, an audio output, a lamp There is a possibility that the decorative display variable display state may reach a reach state due to an effect operation different from the decorative symbol variable display operation such as lighting, or a reach effect may be executed by super reach. In addition, a notice effect may be executed to notify the player in advance that the variable display result may be a “hit”. The effect operation that becomes the notice effect is the variable display state of the decorative symbol after the decorative symbol variable display is started in all of the “left”, “middle”, and “right” decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R. May be executed (started) prior to the reach state (before the decorative symbols are temporarily displayed in the “left” and “right” decorative symbol display areas 5L and 5R). In addition, the notice effect that notifies that the variable display result may be a “big hit” may include one that is executed after the variable display state of the decorative symbol becomes the reach state.

  The notice effect may only include a pre-read notice effect. The pre-reading notice effect is a notice effect that can be executed based on the hold information of the special game before starting the variable display for which the possibility that the variable display result will be a “big hit” is to be notified. is there. In particular, the pre-reading notice effect that continuously predicts the possibility that the variable display result will be a “hit” over the variable display of decorative symbols executed multiple times in response to multiple special drawing games is a continuous notice effect. Also called (continuous production). In addition, while the special figure game is executed once, after temporarily displaying the decorative symbol, the effect display for changing the decorative symbol again (pseudo continuous fluctuation, re-variation) is performed a predetermined number of times, In a gaming machine that executes a “pseudo-continuous” variable display effect that makes it appear as if multiple times of variable display are being executed, the variable display result is “big hit” over the pseudo multiple times of variable display. A notice effect for continuously notifying the possibility and the like is also included in the continuous notice effect (continuous effect).

  In this embodiment, as the pre-reading notice effect, the image display device 5 has a predetermined effect for the continuous effect that is predetermined in the image display device 5 over a plurality of variable displays until the variable display that is the subject of the notice is executed. During a variable symbol display before the stop symbol notice and the variable display subject to the notice notice are executed, the decorative symbols composing the chance eyes (for example, combinations of numbers that are shifted by one or a combination of numbers) are stopped. The background image in the image display device 5 changes from the normal background image to the special background image, and the background change notice that becomes the special background image can be executed until the variable display to be noticed is executed. It has become.

  In addition, in this embodiment, when the variable display is executed separately from such a pre-reading notice effect, the variable display result is determined to be “big hit” based on the variation pattern of the variable display and the variable display result. A notice effect during a change in which the possibility of becoming a notice is announced is executed.

  When a special symbol that becomes a lost symbol is stopped (derived) as a confirmed special symbol in the special symbol game, the variable symbol display state is not changed to the reach state after the variable symbol variable display is started. In addition, a fixed decorative pattern that is a predetermined non-reach combination may be stopped and displayed. Such a decorative display variable display mode is referred to as a “non-reach” (also referred to as “normal loss”) variable display mode when the variable display result is “losing”.

  When a special symbol that becomes a lost symbol is stopped (derived) as a confirmed special symbol in the special symbol game, the variable symbol display state is reached after the variable symbol variable display starts. Correspondingly, after the reach effect is executed, or when the reach effect is not executed, a fixed decorative pattern that becomes a predetermined reach lose combination may be stopped and displayed. Such a variable display result of the decorative design is referred to as a variable display mode of “reach” (also referred to as “reach lose”) when the variable display result is “losing”.

  When the special big win symbol such as the special symbol indicating the number “3” is stopped and displayed as a special symbol for the special opening game as a special symbol for the special opening game, the variable display state of the decorative symbol is changed. Corresponding to reaching the reach state, after a predetermined reach effect is executed or without a reach effect, a predetermined normal big hit combination (“non-probability variable big hit combination) among a plurality of types of big hit combinations ”) Is displayed in a stopped manner. For example, the symbol number that is variably displayed in each of the “left”, “middle”, and “right” decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R in the image display device 5 is “1”. Among the decorative symbols of “8”, any one of the decorative symbols having the even numbers “2”, “4”, “6”, “8” is “left”, “middle”, “right”. Any of the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R may be stopped and displayed on a predetermined effective line. Ornamental symbols having even numbers “2”, “4”, “6”, and “8” that constitute a normal jackpot combination are referred to as normal symbols (also referred to as “non-probable variation symbols”).

  Corresponding to the fact that the confirmed special symbol in the special figure game becomes the normal jackpot symbol, the fixed ornament symbol of the normal jackpot combination is stopped and displayed after the predetermined reach effect is executed or the reach effect is not executed. The decorative display variable display mode is referred to as a variable display mode (also referred to as “big hit type”) of “non-probable change” (also referred to as “normal big hit”) when the variable display result is “big hit”. Based on the fact that the variable display result is “big hit” for the big hit type of “non-probable change”, the normal open big hit state is controlled, and after the end, time reduction control (time reduction control) is performed. By performing the time-shortening control, the special symbol variable display time (special symbol variation time) in the special symbol game is shortened compared to the normal state. The normal state is a normal game state that is different from a specific game state such as a big hit game state, and is an initial setting state of the pachinko gaming machine 1 (for example, an initialization process after power-on, such as when a system reset is performed) The same control as in the state in which is executed. In the time-saving control, one of the conditions is established first, that is, a special game is executed a predetermined number of times (for example, 100 times) after the big hit gaming state is finished and the variable display result is “big hit”. Sometimes it just needs to end.

  As a confirmed special symbol in the special symbol game, among the special symbols that are normally open round jackpot symbols, when the probability variable bonus symbol such as a special symbol indicating the number “7” is stopped and displayed, the decorative symbol variable display state is Corresponding to reaching the reach state, after a reach effect similar to the case where the variable display mode of the decorative design is “normal”, or after the reach effect is not executed, a plurality of types of jackpot combinations Among them, a fixed decorative symbol that is a predetermined probability variation big hit combination may be stopped and displayed. For example, the symbol number that is variably displayed in each of the “left”, “middle”, and “right” decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R in the image display device 5 is “1”. Among the decorative symbols of “8”, any one of the decorative symbols whose symbol numbers are odd numbers “1”, “3”, “5”, “7” is “left”, “middle”, “right”. Any of the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R may be stopped and displayed on a predetermined effective line. The decorative symbols having odd numbers “1”, “3”, “5”, and “7” constituting the probability variation jackpot combination are referred to as probability variation symbols. When the probability variation jackpot symbol is stopped and displayed as a confirmed special symbol in the special figure game, the fixed decoration symbol that is a normal jackpot combination may be stopped and displayed as a variable display result of the decoration symbol.

  Regardless of whether the confirmed decorative symbol is a normal jackpot combination or a promiscuous jackpot combination, the variable display mode in which the probable jackpot symbol is stopped and displayed as a confirmed special symbol in the special figure game has a variable display result of “big hit” This is referred to as a variable display mode of “probability change” (also referred to as “big hit type”). Based on the fact that the variable display result is “big hit” in the “big change” big hit type, the normal open big hit state is controlled, and after the end, the probability variation control (probability change control) is performed together with the time reduction control. By performing the probability variation control, the probability that the variable display result (special display result) becomes “big hit” in each special figure game is improved so as to be higher than in the normal state. The certainty control may be ended when the condition that the variable display result is “big hit” and the game is controlled again in the big hit gaming state after the big hit gaming state is ended. Similar to the time-saving control, the probability variation control may be ended when a special number of games (for example, 100 times) is executed after the end of the big hit gaming state. In addition, even if the probability variation control is ended when the probability variation control is ended by the probability variation control lottery executed every time the special game is started after the big hit gaming state is ended, the probability variation control is terminated. Good.

  When the time reduction control is performed, the normal symbol display unit 20 uses the normal symbol display unit 20 to make the normal symbol change time (normal symbol change time) shorter than that in the normal state, or to change the normal symbol in each time the normal symbol game. Control for improving the probability that the display result is “per normal figure” than in the normal state, and tilt control of the movable blade piece in the normal variable winning ball apparatus 6B based on the fact that the variable display result is “per normal figure”. The game ball can easily pass (enter) the second start winning opening, such as a control to make the tilt control time for performing longer than that in the normal state, and a control to increase the number of tilts than in the normal state. Control that is advantageous to the player is performed by increasing the possibility that the start condition is satisfied. In this way, the control that facilitates the entry of the game ball into the second start winning opening in accordance with the time-shortening control and is advantageous to the player is also referred to as high opening control. As the high opening control, any one of these controls may be performed, or a plurality of controls may be performed in combination.

  By performing the high opening control, the frequency at which the second start winning opening becomes the expanded opening state is higher than when the high opening control is not performed. As a result, the second starting condition for executing the special figure game using the second special figure in the second special symbol display device 4B can be easily established, and the special figure game can be executed frequently. In addition, the time until the variable display result becomes “big hit” is shortened. The period during which the high opening control can be performed is also referred to as a high opening control period, and this period may be the same as the period during which the time reduction control is performed.

  The gaming state in which both the short time control and the high opening control are performed is also referred to as a short time state or a high base state. The gaming state in which the probability variation control is performed is also referred to as a probability variation state or a high probability state. A gaming state in which the time-shortening control or the high opening control is performed together with the probability variation control is also referred to as a high probability high base state. The probability variation state in which only the probability variation control is performed and the short time control or the high opening control is not performed is also referred to as a high probability low base state. It should be noted that only the gaming state in which the time-shortening control or the high opening control is performed together with the probability variation control is sometimes referred to as a “probability variation state”, and may be referred to as a time variation probability variation state in order to be distinguished from the high probability low base state. On the other hand, a probability variation state (high probability low base state) in which only time variation control is performed and time reduction control or high opening control is not performed is sometimes referred to as a time variation probability variation state in order to be distinguished from a high accuracy high base state. The short time state in which the short time control or the high opening control is performed without performing the probability variation control is also referred to as a low probability high base state. The normal state in which neither the probability variation control, the time reduction control nor the high opening control is performed is also referred to as a low probability low base state. When at least one of time-shortening control and probability variation control is performed in a gaming state other than the normal state, the probability that the special-purpose game can be executed frequently and the variable display result in each special-purpose game becomes “big hit” As a result, the player is in an advantageous state. A gaming state advantageous to a player different from the big hit gaming state is also referred to as a special gaming state.

  As a confirmed special symbol in the special symbol game, when a short-term open round jackpot symbol such as a special symbol indicating “5” is stopped or displayed, or a small bonus symbol such as a special symbol indicating “2” is stopped or displayed. In some cases, the variable display state of the decorative symbol does not reach the reach state, and any one of a combination of a plurality of types of fixed decorative symbols determined in advance as the chance of opening may be displayed in a stopped manner. In addition, when the short-term opening round jackpot symbol is stopped and displayed as a confirmed special symbol in the special symbol game, a predetermined reach effect is executed in response to the variable symbol display state of the ornament symbol being reached. After that, a fixed decorative pattern (a fixed decorative pattern serving as a chance corresponding to the short-term open round big hit state) that is a predetermined reach combination may be stopped and displayed.

  Corresponding to the fact that the confirmed special symbol in the special figure game becomes the short-term open round jackpot symbol, the variable display mode of the decorative symbol in which various fixed ornament symbols are stopped and displayed is when the variable display result is "big hit" This is referred to as a variable display mode (also referred to as a “big hit type”) of “surprise accuracy” (also referred to as “surprise probability big hit” or “sudden probability change big hit”). Based on the fact that the variable display result is “big hit” in the “surprise” big hit type, the short-term open big hit state is controlled, and after the end, the probability variation control may be performed together with the short time control.

  Based on the fact that the small hit symbol such as the special symbol indicating the number “2” is stopped and the variable display result is “small hit” as the confirmed special symbol in the special figure game, the small hit game state is controlled. After that, the gaming state is not changed, and the gaming state before the variable display result is “small hit” is continuously controlled. However, if the number of executions of the special figure game in the special gaming state has reached a predetermined number when the special figure game with the variable display result of “small hit” is executed, after the end of the small hit gaming state, The special gaming state may end and return to the normal state.

  If the winning symbol is opened after the final decorative symbol composing the opening chance is derived and displayed as the variable display result of the decorative symbol, the variable display result is “big hit” and the big hit type is “accurate” There is a case where it is controlled to a short hit big hit state based on that, and a case where it is controlled to a small hit gaming state based on the fact that the variable display result is “small hit”. On the other hand, the winning winning opening is opened after the definite decorative symbols constituting the reach combination are derived and displayed as the variable display result of the decorative symbols. The variable display result is “big hit” and the big hit type is “exact” Only when it is controlled to a short-term open big hit state. Therefore, the confirmed decorative symbols that make up the opening chances correspond to being controlled to either the short-term open big hit state or the small hit gaming state, while the fixed decorative symbols of the reach combination are short-term open big hit states It corresponds to being controlled by.

  A re-lottery effect may be executed during the variable display of the decorative symbols in which the determined decorative symbol is a non-probabilistic big hit combination or a probable big hit combination. In the re-lottery effect, after the decorative symbols that are usually the big hit combinations are displayed temporarily on the “left”, “middle”, and “right” decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R on the image display device 5, for example, “left ”,“ Medium ”,“ Right ”decorative symbols display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R with the same decorative symbols in the same state, and then fluctuate again. One of the decorative symbols (normal symbols) to be combined is stopped and displayed as a final decorative symbol (final stop display). Here, when the re-lottery effect is executed when the big hit type is “non-probable change”, as the re-lottery effect, the fixed decorative symbol that becomes the normal jackpot combination after re-changing the temporarily stopped decorative symbol is displayed. A re-lottery selection effect for deriving and displaying is performed. On the other hand, when the re-lottery effect is executed when the big hit type is “probable change”, as the re-lottery effect, the confirmed decoration that becomes a probable big hit combination after re-changing the temporarily stopped display of the decorative symbols A re-lottery winning effect that stops and displays a symbol may be executed, or a re-lottery winning effect may be executed.

  After the decisive decorative symbol that is normally a jackpot combination is derived and displayed, at the start of the jackpot gaming state or during the round in the jackpot gaming state, one round ends in the jackpot gaming state and the next round starts During the big hit that will be a promising change notification effect whether or not to control to the probable change state, such as the period from the end of the last round in the big hit gaming state until the start of the next variable display game A promotion effect may be executed. Note that a notification effect similar to the jackpot promotion effect may be executed during the first variable display game after the end of the jackpot gaming state. The jackpot promotion effect that is executed after the final round in the jackpot game state is particularly called “ending promotion effect”.

  In the jackpot promotion effect, there is a jackpot promotion promotion effect that informs that there is a promotion that the gaming state becomes a probable change state even though the confirmed decorative pattern is a normal jackpot combination, and that there is no promotion that becomes a probable change state There is a promotion promotion failure during the jackpot to be notified. For example, in the jackpot promotion effect, the decorative symbol is variably displayed in the display area of the image display device 5 and either the normal symbol or the probability variable symbol is stopped and displayed as the effect display result, or the decorative symbol is variably displayed. May be notified so that the player can recognize the presence or absence of promotion to be in a certain change state by displaying different effect images.

  Various control boards such as a main board 11, an effect control board 12, an audio control board 13, and a lamp control board 14 as shown in FIG. 2 are mounted on the pachinko gaming machine 1. The pachinko gaming machine 1 is also equipped with a relay board 15 for relaying various control signals transmitted between the main board 11 and the effect control board 12. In addition, various boards such as a payout control board, an information terminal board, a launch control board, and an interface board are disposed on the back surface of the game board 2 in the pachinko gaming machine 1.

  The main board 11 is a main-side control board, and various circuits for controlling the progress of the game in the pachinko gaming machine 1 are mounted. The main board 11 is mainly addressed to a sub-side control board composed of a random number setting function used in a special game, a function of inputting a signal from a switch or the like disposed at a predetermined position, and an effect control board 12. A function of outputting and transmitting a control command as an example of command information as a control signal, a function of outputting various information to a hall management computer, and the like are provided. In addition, the main board 11 performs on / off control of each LED (for example, segment LED) constituting the first special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol display device 4B, and thereby the first special diagram and the second special diagram. Variable display of a predetermined display pattern such as controlling the variable display of the normal symbol display 20 or controlling the variable symbol display of the normal symbol display 20 by controlling the lighting / extinction / coloring control of the normal symbol display 20. It also has a function to control.

  The main board 11 includes, for example, a game control microcomputer 100, a switch circuit 110 that receives detection signals from various switches for game ball detection and transmits the detection signals to the game control microcomputer 100, and the game control microcomputer 100. A solenoid circuit 111 for transmitting a solenoid drive signal to the solenoids 81 and 82 is mounted.

  The effect control board 12 is a sub-side control board independent of the main board 11, receives the control signal transmitted from the main board 11 via the relay board 15, and receives the image display device 5, the speakers 8L, 8R. In addition, various circuits for controlling the production operation by the production electrical parts such as the game effect lamp 9 are mounted. That is, the effect control board 12 provides effects such as the display operation in the image display device 5, all or part of the sound output operation from the speakers 8L and 8R, and all or part of the turn-on / off operation in the game effect lamp 9 or the like. A function of determining the control content for causing the electrical component to execute a predetermined performance operation is provided.

  The sound control board 13 is a control board for sound output control provided separately from the effect control board 12, and outputs sound from the speakers 8L and 8R based on commands and control data from the effect control board 12. For example, a processing circuit for executing audio signal processing is mounted. The lamp control board 14 is a control board for lamp output control provided separately from the effect control board 12, and is turned on / off in the game effect lamp 9 and the like based on commands and control data from the effect control board 12. A lamp driver circuit for driving is mounted.

  As shown in FIG. 2, wiring for transmitting detection signals from the gate switch 21, the first start port switch 22 </ b> A, the second start port switch 22 </ b> B, and the count switch 23 is connected to the main board 11. The gate switch 21, the first start port switch 22A, the second start port switch 22B, and the count switch 23 have an arbitrary configuration that can detect a game ball as a game medium, such as a sensor. What is necessary is just to have. In addition, the main board 11 includes a first special symbol display device 4A, a second special symbol display device 4B, a normal symbol display device 20, a first hold display device 25A, a second hold display device 25B, and a general drawing hold display device 25C. Wiring for transmitting a command signal for performing display control such as is connected.

  A control signal transmitted from the main board 11 toward the effect control board 12 is relayed by the relay board 15. The control command transmitted from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12 via the relay board 15 is, for example, an effect control command transmitted and received as an electric signal. The effect control command includes, for example, a display control command used for controlling an image display operation in the image display device 5, a voice control command used for controlling sound output from the speakers 8L and 8R, and a game effect lamp 9. And a lamp control command used for controlling the lighting operation of the decoration LED and the like.

  FIG. 3A is an explanatory diagram showing an example of the contents of the effect control command used in this embodiment. The effect control command has, for example, a 2-byte structure, and the first byte indicates MODE (command classification), and the second byte indicates EXT (command type). The first bit (bit 7) of the MODE data is always “1”, and the first bit of the EXT data is “0”. Note that the command form shown in FIG. 3A is an example, and other command forms may be used. In this example, the control command is composed of two control signals. However, the number of control signals constituting the control command may be one or a plurality of three or more.

  In the example shown in FIG. 3A, a command 8001H is a first change start command for designating start of change in a special figure game using the first special figure in the first special symbol display device 4A. Command 8002H is a second variation start command for designating the start of variation in a special symbol game using the second special symbol in second special symbol display device 4B. The command 81XXH is a decoration that is variably displayed in the “left”, “middle”, and “right” decoration symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R in the image display device 5 in response to the variable display of the special symbol in the special symbol game. This is a variation pattern designation command for designating a variation pattern such as a symbol. Here, XXH indicates an unspecified hexadecimal number, and may be a value arbitrarily set according to the instruction content by the effect control command. In the variation pattern designation command, different EXT data is set according to the variation pattern to be designated.

  Command 8CXXH is a variable display result notification command for designating a variable display result such as a special symbol or a decorative symbol. In the variable display result notification command, for example, as shown in FIG. 3B, the determination result (predetermined result) whether the variable display result is “lost” or “big hit”, and the variable display result is “big hit”. The different EXT data is set in accordance with the determination result (the jackpot type determination result) as to which of a plurality of types of jackpot types in the case of "". More specifically, the command 8C00H is a first variable display result notification command indicating a pre-determined result indicating that the variable display result is “lost”. The command 8C01H is a second variable display result notification command for notifying a pre-determined result and a big hit type determination result that the variable display result is “big hit” and the big hit type is “non-probable change”. The command 8C02H is a third variable display result notification command for notifying the advance determination result that the variable display result is “big hit” and the big hit type is “probable change” and the big hit type determination result. The command 8C03H is a fourth variable display result notification command for notifying a pre-determined result and a big hit type determination result that the variable display result is “big hit” and the big hit type is “surprise”. The command 8C04H is a fifth variable display result notification command indicating a predetermined result indicating that the variable display result is “small hit”.

  The command 8F00H is a symbol confirmation command for designating the change stop (determination) of decorative symbols in the “left”, “middle”, and “right” decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R in the image display device 5. The command 95XXH is a gaming state designation command for designating the current gaming state in the pachinko gaming machine 1. In the gaming state designation command, for example, different EXT data is set according to the current gaming state in the pachinko gaming machine 1. As a specific example, the command 9500H is a first gaming state designation command corresponding to a gaming state (low probability low base state, normal state) in which neither the time shortening control nor the probability variation control is performed, and the command 9501H is performed by the time shortening control. On the other hand, a second gaming state designation command corresponding to a gaming state (low probability high base state, short time state) in which probability variation control is not performed is used. In addition, the command 9502H is a third gaming state designation command corresponding to a gaming state (high probability low base state, timeless probability variation state) in which probability variation control is performed while time variation control is not performed, and command 9503H is probability variation and time variation control. It is assumed that the fourth gaming state designation command corresponds to the gaming state in which the control is performed together (highly accurate high base state, time-varying probability changing state).

  The command A0XXH is a hit start designation command (also referred to as a “fanfare command”) that designates display of an effect image indicating the start of a big hit gaming state or a small hit gaming state. The command A1XXH is a big winning opening releasing notification command for notifying that the big winning opening is a period in the big winning gaming state or the small winning gaming state. The command A2XXH is a notification command after opening the big winning opening that notifies that the big winning opening has changed from the open state to the closed state in the big hit gaming state or the small hit gaming state. The command A3XXH is a hit end designation command for designating display of an effect image at the end of the big hit gaming state or the small hit gaming state.

  In the hit start designation command or the hit end designation command, for example, EXT data similar to that of the variable display result notification command is set, so that different EXT data may be set according to the predetermined determination result or the big hit type determination result. . Alternatively, in the hit start designation command and the hit end designation command, the correspondence relationship between the pre-determined result and the big hit type determination result and the set EXT data may be different from the correspondence relationship in the variable display result notification command. . In the notification command during the opening of the big winning opening and the notification command after the opening of the big winning opening, for example, different EXT data corresponding to the number of round executions (for example, “1” to “15”) in the normal opening big hit state or the short-term opening big hit state. Is set.

  The command B100H is based on the fact that the game ball that has passed (entered) the first start winning opening formed by the normal winning ball apparatus 6A is detected by the first start opening switch 22A and a start winning (first start winning) has occurred. The first start opening prize designation command for notifying that the first start condition for executing the special figure game using the first special figure in the first special symbol display device 4A is established. The command B200H indicates that the game ball that has passed (entered) the second start winning opening formed by the normally variable winning ball apparatus 6B is detected by the second start opening switch 22B and a start winning (second start winning) has occurred. Based on this, the second start opening prize designation command is used to notify that the second start condition for executing the special figure game using the second special figure in the second special symbol display device 4B is established.

  The command C1XXH is a first reserved memory number notification command for notifying the first special figure reserved memory number in order to display the special figure reserved memory number in a start winning memory display area 5H or the like. The command C2XXH is a second reserved memory number notification command for notifying the second special figure reserved memory number in order to display the special figure reserved memory number in a start winning memory display area 5H or the like. The first reserved memory number notification command is, for example, when the first start opening winning designation command is transmitted based on the fact that the game ball passes (enters) the first starting winning opening and the first start condition is satisfied. , Transmitted from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12. The second reserved memory number notification command is, for example, when the second start opening winning designation command is transmitted based on the fact that the game ball passes (enters) the second start winning opening and the second start condition is satisfied. And transmitted from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12. In addition, the first reserved memory number notification command and the second reserved memory number notification command correspond to the case where the execution of the special game is started when either the first start condition or the second start condition is satisfied. May be transmitted.

  The first reserved memory number notification command is transmitted as a notification of an increase in the first special figure reserved memory number when the first start condition is satisfied by the occurrence of the first start winning. Further, the second reserved memory count notification command is transmitted as a notification of an increase in the second special figure reserved memory count when the second start condition is satisfied by the occurrence of the second start winning.

  In this embodiment, a first start opening winning designation command or a second starting opening winning designation command for designating which of the first start winning opening and the second starting winning opening is selected as the hold storage information is transmitted. At the same time, a first reserved memory number notification command and a second reserved memory number notification command for designating the first special figure reserved memory number and the second special figure reserved memory number are transmitted. In addition, when the number of reserved memories increases, a reserved memory number addition designation command (a first reserved memory number addition designation command or a second one) indicates that the first special figure reserved memory number or the second special figure reserved memory number has increased. When the reserved memory number decreases, the reserved memory number addition designation command (the second reserved figure number designation command) indicates that the first special figure reserved memory number or the second special figure reserved memory number has decreased. 1 reserved memory number subtraction designation command or second reserved memory number subtraction designation command) may be transmitted.

  Instead of the first reserved memory number notification command and the second reserved memory number notification command, a total reserved memory number notification command for notifying the total reserved memory number may be transmitted. That is, a total pending storage number notification command for notifying an increase (or decrease) in the total pending storage number may be used.

  The command C4XXH and the command C6XXH are effect control commands (winning determination result designation command) indicating the contents of the winning determination result. Of these, the command C4XXH is a symbol designating command indicating whether or not the variable display result is “big hit” or “small hit” as the winning determination result, and whether or not the big hit type is determined. The command C6XXH is a variation category command indicating a determination result (variation pattern type determination result) as to which range of the random value MR3 for determining the variation pattern type falls as a winning determination result.

  In this embodiment, in the winning random number determination process (see FIG. 14A), whether or not the variable display result is determined as “big hit” or “small hit” is determined based on the occurrence of the start winning. It is determined whether or not the decision value range is the random value MR3 for determining the type of jackpot or the variation pattern type. Then, in the EXT data of the symbol designating command, a value for designating that the variable display result is determined to be “big hit” or “small jackpot” and a value for designating the big hit type are set. Control to send. Further, a value for designating a range of a determined value in which the random value MR3 as the determination result is included in the EXT data of the variation category command is set, and control for transmission to the effect control board 12 is performed. The effect control CPU 120 mounted on the effect control board 12 determines whether or not the variable display result is determined to be “big hit” or “small hit” based on the value set in the symbol designation command, Based on the value set in the variation category command, the variation pattern type can be recognized when the random value MR3 for variation pattern type determination is included in the predetermined range of determination values.

  As an example of the symbol designating command, the command C400H is the first symbol designating command corresponding to the case where the variable display result is “lost”, and the command C401H is the variable display result “big hit” and the big hit type is “probable change”. And the command C402H is the third symbol designation command corresponding to the case where the variable display result is “big hit” and the big hit type is “non-probable change”, and the command C403H is the variable symbol display result “big hit”. ”Is a fourth symbol designation command corresponding to the case where the big hit type is“ surprise ”, and the command C404H is a fifth symbol designation command corresponding to the case where the variable display result is“ small hit ”. Note that the EXT data set in the symbol designating command and the EXT data set in the variable display result notification command may be shared.

  The game control microcomputer 100 mounted on the main board 11 is, for example, a one-chip microcomputer, and includes a ROM (Read Only Memory) 101 for storing a game control program, fixed data, and the like, and a game control work. A RAM (Random Access Memory) 102 that provides an area, a CPU (Central Processing Unit) 103 that executes a control program by executing a game control program, and updates numeric data indicating random values independently of the CPU 103 A random number circuit 104 to perform and an I / O (Input / Output port) 105 are provided.

  As an example, in the game control microcomputer 100, a process for controlling the progress of the game in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is executed by the CPU 103 executing a program read from the ROM 101. At this time, the CPU 103 reads fixed data from the ROM 101, the CPU 103 writes various fluctuation data to the RAM 102 and temporarily stores the fluctuation data, and the CPU 103 temporarily stores the various fluctuation data. The CPU 103 receives the input of various signals from outside the game control microcomputer 100 via the I / O 105, and the CPU 103 goes outside the game control microcomputer 100 via the I / O 105. A transmission operation for outputting various signals is also performed.

  FIG. 4 is an explanatory view illustrating random numbers counted on the main board 11 side. As shown in FIG. 4, in this embodiment, on the side of the main board 11, a random value MR1 for determining a special figure display result, a random value MR2 for determining a jackpot type, a random value MR3 for determining a variation pattern type, Numerical data indicating the random number value MR4 for determining the variation pattern and the random value MR5 for determining the normal display result are controlled to be countable. In addition, in order to improve a game effect, random numbers other than these may be used. Such random numbers used to control the progress of the game are also referred to as game random numbers.

  The random number circuit 104 only needs to count numerical data indicating some or all of these random number values MR1 to MR5. For example, the CPU 103 uses a random counter different from the random number circuit 104 such as a random counter provided in the game control counter setting unit 154 shown in FIG. Numerical data indicating a part of MR5 may be counted.

  The random value MR1 for determining the special figure display result is determined whether the variable display result of the special symbol or the like in the special figure game is controlled as a big hit game state, whether the variable display result is "small hit" or not. This is a random value used for determining whether or not to control the gaming state, and takes a value in the range of “1” to “65535”, for example. The random number MR2 for determining the jackpot type determines the jackpot type, which is the variable display mode of the decorative symbol when the variable display result is “big hit”, as one of “non-probability change”, “probability change”, and “surprise change”. For example, a value in the range of “1” to “100”.

  The random number value MR3 for determining the variation pattern type is a random value used for determining the variation display mode of the variation pattern, and takes a value in the range of “1” to “251”, for example. The random number MR4 for determining the variation pattern is a random value used to determine the variation pattern in the variable display of the special symbol or the decorative symbol as one of a plurality of types prepared in advance. For example, “1” to “ It takes a value in the range of “997”. The random value MR5 for determining the general-purpose display result is used for determining whether the variable display result in the general-purpose game by the normal symbol display 20 is “per-normal” or “unusual for general-purpose”. For example, a value in the range of “3” to “13”.

  FIG. 5 shows a variation pattern in this embodiment. In this embodiment, among the cases where the variable display result is “losing”, the variable display mode of the decorative design is “non-reach” and “reach”, respectively. Corresponding to the case where the display result is “big hit”, a plurality of variation patterns are prepared in advance. The variation pattern corresponding to the case where the variable display result is “losing” and the decorative symbol variable display mode is “non-reach” is called a non-reach variation pattern (also referred to as “non-reach loss variation pattern”) and is variable. The variation pattern corresponding to the case where the display result is “losing” and the decorative symbol variable display mode is “reach” is referred to as a reach variation pattern (also referred to as “reach loss variation pattern”). Further, the non-reach variation pattern and the reach variation pattern are included in the loss variation pattern corresponding to the case where the variable display result is “lost”. A variation pattern corresponding to the case where the variable display result is “big hit” is referred to as a big hit variation pattern.

  The big hit fluctuation pattern and the reach fluctuation pattern include a normal reach fluctuation pattern in which a normal reach reach effect is executed and a super reach change pattern in which a super reach reach effect such as super reach α or super reach β is executed. The big hit variation pattern and the small hit variation pattern are included in the hit variation pattern corresponding to the case where the variable display result is “big hit” or “small hit”.

  The variation pattern corresponding to the case of “non-reach” is a variation pattern that does not shorten the variation time, or the total number of reserved storage is “2” to “4” or “5” to “8” Corresponding to the variation pattern, the variation time is shortened. Furthermore, a variation pattern corresponding to a case where the time control such as the game state is a probabilistic change state or a time reduction state is executed, or a pseudo-ream is executed. By selecting any one of these variation patterns according to the total number of reserved memories and the gaming state, it is possible to control to shorten the variation time according to the total number of reserved memories and the gaming state.

  Each variation pattern shown in FIG. 5 may be included in at least one variation pattern type among a plurality of variation pattern types. That is, each variation pattern type may be configured to include a single or a plurality of variation patterns classified (grouped) based on, for example, a mode of a rendering operation performed during variable display of decorative symbols. Good.

  In addition to the game control program, the ROM 101 included in the game control microcomputer 100 shown in FIG. 2 stores various selection data and table data used for controlling the progress of the game. . For example, the ROM 101 stores data constituting a plurality of determination tables, determination tables, setting tables and the like prepared for the CPU 103 to perform various determinations, determinations, and settings. Further, the ROM 101 stores a plurality of types of table data constituting a plurality of command tables used for the CPU 103 to transmit control signals serving as various control commands from the main board 11, and a variation pattern as shown in FIG. Table data constituting a variation pattern table to be stored is stored.

  As shown in FIG. 6 (a), in this embodiment, a battle effect is executed for 60 seconds after the start of the variation of the special symbol, and a win is obtained by winning the battle effect. The mission effect for deriving and displaying the combination decorative pattern is set to be executable, and the variation pattern table described above stores mission variation patterns PMA-1 to PME-1 to be executed in this mission effect. .

  Among the mission variation patterns executed in these mission effects, PMA-1 is a variation pattern that becomes “lost” in the variation time of the special symbol for 60 seconds. After executing the battle 1 effect in which the character and the enemy character (see FIG. 38) attack each other, a divided effect indicating that the result of the battle 1 effect is a draw is executed. After 40 seconds from the start, after the battle 2 effect in which the ally character and the enemy character attack each other, the division effect indicating that the result of the battle 2 effect is a draw is executed, and the variation of the special symbol is started. After 40 seconds to 55 seconds, after the battle 3 effect in which the ally character and the enemy character attack each other is executed, Execute a defeat effect that indicates that the ally character is defeated, and between 55 seconds and 60 seconds after the start of the change of the special symbol, the mission character was not achieved ("lost") because the ally character was defeated It is a fluctuation pattern for executing a disappointing effect indicating

  PMB-1 is a mission fluctuation pattern that is a “big hit” with a special symbol fluctuation time of 20 seconds. This is a fluctuation pattern for executing a victory effect indicating that a mission is achieved ("hit") by winning a teammate character as a result of the battle 1 effect after executing a battle 1 effect.

  PMB-2 is a mission fluctuation pattern that becomes a “big hit” with a special symbol fluctuation time of 40 seconds, and an ally character and an enemy character (see FIG. 38) each other within 20 seconds from the start of the fluctuation of the special symbol. After performing the battle 1 production that attacks, the division production is executed to indicate that the result of the battle 1 production is a draw, and between 20 seconds and 40 seconds after the start of the change of the special symbol, the teammate character and the enemy character This is a variation pattern for executing a victory effect indicating that a mission has been achieved ("hit") by winning a teammate character as a result of the battle 2 effect after performing a battle 2 effect that attacks each other. .

  PMB-3 is a mission fluctuation pattern that becomes a “big hit” with a special symbol fluctuation time of 55 seconds, and an ally character and an enemy character (see FIG. 38) each other within 20 seconds from the start of the special symbol fluctuation. After performing the battle 1 production that attacks, the division production is executed to indicate that the result of the battle 1 production is a draw, and between 20 seconds and 40 seconds after the start of the change of the special symbol, the teammate character and the enemy character After performing the battle 2 production that attacks each other, the division production is executed to indicate that the result of the battle 2 production is a draw. And the enemy character and each other attacked each other, after performing the battle 3 production, as a result of the battle 3 production, the ally character won the mission ("Large Ri ") and is the variation pattern to perform a victory performance that indicates that became.

  PMC-1 is a mission variation pattern that becomes a “big hit” with a variation time of a special symbol of 25 seconds, and an ally character and an enemy character (see FIG. 38) can interact with each other within 20 seconds from the start of the variation of the special symbol. After performing the battle 1 production to attack, the division production is executed to indicate that the result of the battle 1 production is a draw, and the teammate character wins within 20 to 25 seconds after the start of the special symbol change. This is a variation pattern for executing the resurrection effect 1 indicating that the mission has been achieved ("big hit").

  PMC-2 is a mission fluctuation pattern that becomes a “big hit” with a special symbol fluctuation time of 40 seconds. After performing the battle 1 production to attack, the division production is executed to indicate that the result of the battle 1 production is a draw, and the teammate character wins for 20 to 40 seconds after the start of the special symbol change. This is a fluctuation pattern for executing the resurrection effect 2 indicating that the mission has been achieved ("big hit").

  PMC-3 is a mission fluctuation pattern that becomes a “big hit” with a special symbol fluctuation time of 60 seconds, and an ally character and an enemy character (see FIG. 38) each other within 20 seconds from the start of the fluctuation of the special symbol. After performing the battle 1 production to attack, the division production is executed to indicate that the result of the battle 1 production is a draw, and the teammate character wins between 20 seconds and 60 seconds after the start of the variation of the special symbol. This is a variation pattern for executing the resurrection effect 3 indicating that the mission has been achieved ("big hit").

  PMD-1 is a mission variation pattern that becomes a “big hit” in the variation time of the special symbol for 45 seconds. After performing the battle 1 production that attacks, the division production is executed to indicate that the result of the battle 1 production is a draw. After performing the battle 2 production in which they attack each other, a division production showing that the result of the battle 2 production is a draw is executed. Is a fluctuation pattern for executing the resurrection effect 1 indicating that the mission has been won and the mission is achieved ("big hit").

  PMD-2 is a mission variation pattern that becomes a “big hit” in the variation time of the special symbol for 60 seconds, and the ally character and the enemy character (see FIG. 38) each other within 20 seconds from the start of variation of the special symbol. After performing the battle 1 production that attacks, the division production is executed to indicate that the result of the battle 1 production is a draw, and between 20 seconds and 40 seconds after the start of the change of the special symbol, the teammate character and the enemy character After performing the battle 2 production that attacks each other, a division production showing that the result of the battle 2 production is a draw is executed. Is a fluctuation pattern for executing the resurrection effect 2 indicating that the mission has been won and the mission is achieved ("big hit").

  PME-1 is a mission variation pattern that becomes a “big hit” with a variation time of a special symbol of 60 seconds, and an ally character and an enemy character (see FIG. 38) can interact with each other within 20 seconds from the start of the variation of the special symbol. After performing the battle 1 production that attacks, the division production is executed to indicate that the result of the battle 1 production is a draw, and between 20 seconds and 40 seconds after the start of the change of the special symbol, the teammate character and the enemy character After performing the battle 2 production that attacks each other, the division production is executed to indicate that the result of the battle 2 production is a draw. After performing the battle 3 performance in which the enemy character and the enemy character attack each other, execute a defeat effect indicating that the result of the battle 3 performance is a defeat of the teammate character, Between 55 seconds after the start of variation in the different symbols of the 60 seconds, a variation pattern for executing revival effect 1 to win ally character indicating that a mission accomplished ( "big hit").

  These mission fluctuation patterns PMB-1 to PMB-3, PMC-1 to PMC-3, PMD-1 to PMD-2, and PME-1 indicate that the gaming state is in a high probability state (in the jackpot determination) A gaming state with a high probability of being determined to be a big hit (also known as a probable change state). This is a variation pattern of “big hit” that may be executed both in the case of winning the normal big hit that shifts to the state (see FIG. 7).

  In addition, when winning a promising big hit, the ratio of executing PMC-1 to PMC-3, PMD-1 to PMD-2, and PME-1 that execute the resurrection effect in the mission effect is the PMB that does not execute the resurrection effect -1 to PMB-3 are set higher than the rate of execution. On the other hand, when winning a normal jackpot, the proportion of PMB-1 to PMB-3 that do not execute the revival effect is PMC-1 to PMC-3, PMD-1 to PMD-2 that execute the revival effect. , PME-1 is set higher than the rate of execution (see FIG. 8).

  In addition, as shown in FIG. 6A, in all the mission variation patterns executed in the mission effect, the battle effect is performed between the start of the special symbol change and the battle 1 effect. A suggestion effect that suggests whether or not to win can be executed. This suggestion effect is a variation pattern with a short variation time of a special symbol in the mission effect (for example, PMB-1 that wins by the battle 1 effect, or PMC- that wins by executing the resurrection effect 1 after the divided effect after the battle 1 effect) When 1) is executed, that is, when a small number of battles are won and a big win is achieved, the execution rate is set high, and the mission fluctuation pattern (with a long variation time of the special symbol in the mission effect) ( For example, when PMB-3 that wins in the battle 3 effect or PMC-3 that executes the resurrection effect 1 after the defeat effect after the battle 3 effect is executed, that is, win in many battles. When it is a big hit, the execution rate is set low.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 6B, the revival effect 1 executed with the mission variation patterns PMC-1, PMD-1, and PME-1 is a 5-second period indicating that the mission is achieved ("big hit"). Resurrection effect 2, which is composed only of the resurrection victory effect, and is executed with the variation patterns PMC-2 and PMD-2, is a 10-second resurrection A effect in which the ally character emits resurrection speech A, and a 5-second resurrection battle. The rebirth effect 3 executed with the mission variation pattern PMC-3 is composed of the rebirth line effect of 30 seconds and the rebirth line B of 30 seconds when the teammate character emits the rebirth line B. It consists of a revival battle production and a 5-second revival victory production.

  That is, the revival victory effect constituting the revival effect 1 is a common effect part that is executed even in the final 5 seconds of the revival effect 2 and the revival effect 3. For this reason, when the mission variation pattern for executing the resurrection effect 1 is executed, the effect control process data corresponding to the resurrection effect 1 for the final 5 seconds of the mission variation pattern for executing the resurrection effect 2 or the resurrection effect 3 is executed. By setting in the process table of the mission variation pattern to be performed, it is not necessary to provide the revival effect 1 as individual data, so that the data capacity of the entire revival effect can be reduced.

  FIG. 7 shows the variation pattern types in this embodiment. Each variation pattern shown in FIG. 5 is included in at least one variation pattern type among the plurality of variation pattern types shown in FIG. That is, each variation pattern type may be configured to include one or a plurality of variation patterns classified (grouped) based on, for example, an effect operation performed during variable display of decorative symbols. As an example, a variation pattern type that includes a variation pattern in which a variable display state of a decorative design does not become a reach state by classifying (grouping) a plurality of variation patterns according to the type of reach effect (effect mode), and a variation with normal reach What is necessary is just to divide into the fluctuation pattern classification in which the pattern is included, and the fluctuation pattern classification in which the fluctuation pattern with a super reach (super reach α or super reach β) is included. As another example, categorizing (grouping) multiple variation patterns according to the presence or absence of “pseudo-continuous” variable display effects and the number of executions of pseudo-continuous variation (re-variation) to execute “pseudo-continuous” variable display effects A variation pattern type that includes a variation pattern that is not included, a variation pattern type that includes a variation pattern in which the number of executions of the pseudo-continuous variation (re-variation) is 1 in the variable display effect of “pseudo-continuous”, and “pseudo-continuous” What is necessary is just to divide into the variation pattern classification in which the variation pattern which makes the frequency | count of execution of a pseudo | simulation continuous variation (revariation) 2 or more is included in the variable display effect of this. As yet another example, a plurality of variation patterns may be classified (grouped) according to the presence or absence of variable display effects such as “pseudo-continuous” and “slip”, or the variable display time of decorative symbols. Among the plurality of variation pattern types, there may be one configured to include a common variation pattern.

  In the example shown in FIG. 7, the variation pattern type CA1-1 to variation pattern type CA1-6 are prepared in advance in correspondence with the case where the variable display result is “losing” and the variable display mode is “non-reach”. Yes. Corresponding to the case where the variable display result is “losing” and “variable” variable display mode, variation pattern types CA2-1 to CA2-4 are prepared in advance. Corresponding to the variable display mode (big hit type) of “big hit” when the variable display result is “big hit”, the variable pattern type CA3-1 to the variable pattern type CA3-3, the variable pattern type CA5-1 to A variation pattern type CA5-2 is prepared in advance. Corresponding to the case where the variable display result is “big hit” and the variable display mode (big hit type) of “surprise” or the variable display result is “small hit”, the variation pattern type CA4-1 is prepared in advance. ing. The variation pattern type CA4-2 is prepared in advance only when the variable display result is the “big hit” and the “surprise” variable display mode (big hit type).

  In the variation pattern type CA1-1, when the game state is in the low base such as the normal state, the variable display time of the special symbol or the decorative symbol is not shortened, and the variable pattern such as “pseudo-ream” or “slip” is variable. The variation pattern type is “no shortening (normal state)” in which the display effect is not executed, and includes a variation pattern PA1-1 associated in advance. Fluctuation pattern type CA1-2 corresponds to the fact that the number of special figure reserved memory as the total reserved memory number is 2 to 4 when the gaming state is in the low base such as the normal state, It is a variation pattern type of “hold 2 to 4 shortened (normal state)” in which variable display time such as “pseudo ream” and “slip” is not executed because the variable display time of the decorative symbol is shortened and associated in advance Variation pattern PA1-2. The variable pattern types CA1-3 have a variable display time for special symbols and decorative symbols corresponding to the total number of reserved memories being 5 to 8 when the gaming state is in a low base such as a normal state. It is a variation pattern type of “Reservation 5-8 shortened (normal state)” in which variable display effects such as “pseudo ream” and “slip” are not executed, and a variation pattern PA1-3 associated in advance is displayed. Contains.

  In the variation pattern types CA1-4, when the gaming state is in a high base such as a short-time state, the variable display time of special symbols and decorative symbols is not shortened, and variable such as “pseudo-ream” and “sliding” The variation pattern type is “no shortening (during high base)” in which the display effect is not executed, and includes a variation pattern PA1-4 associated in advance. The variable pattern type CA1-5 has a variable display time of special symbols and decorative symbols corresponding to the total number of reserved memories being 2 to 8 when the gaming state is in a high base such as a short time state. It is a variation pattern type “shortened 2 to 8 (high base)” that is shortened and the variable display effect of “pseudo-ream” or “slip” is not executed. Contains. The variation pattern type CA1-6 is a variation pattern type of “sliding, pseudo-continuous” in which a variable display effect of “pseudo-run” or “slip” is executed when the variable display mode is “non-reach”. The associated variation patterns PD1-1 to variation patterns PD1-3 are included.

  The variation pattern type CA2-1 is when the reach effect is ended with the normal reach that becomes the normal reach effect after the variable display state of the decorative symbol is set to the reach state without executing the variable display effect of the “pseudo-ream”. Is a variation pattern type of “no normal reach (losing) pseudo-ream” for deriving and displaying a definite decorative symbol of the reach combination, and includes a variation pattern PB1-1 associated in advance. In the variation pattern type CA2-2, when the “pseudo-continuous” variable display effect is executed, the variable display state of the decorative symbol is set to the reach state, followed by normal reach, and when the reach effect ends, the fixed decorative symbol of the reach combination is displayed. Is a variation pattern type of “normal reach (miss) pseudo-relation” and includes a variation pattern PD1-4 associated in advance. The variation pattern type CA2-3 is a super-reach (super-reach α or super-reach β) after the decorative display variable display state is set to the reach state regardless of whether or not the “pseudo-continuous” variable display effect is executed. Is a variation pattern type of “super reach (losing)” for deriving and displaying a definite decorative symbol of the reach combination when the reach production ends, and variation patterns PB1-2 to PB1-3 associated in advance , Fluctuation patterns PD1-5 to fluctuation patterns PD1-7 are included.

  In the variation pattern type CA3-1, the variable display effect of “pseudo-continuous” is not executed, but the normal display is performed after the variable symbol display state of the decorative pattern is set to the reach state, and when the reach effect ends, the definite decoration of the jackpot combination is determined. It is a variation pattern type of “no normal reach (big hit) pseudo-ream” for deriving and displaying a symbol, and includes a variation pattern PB2-1 associated in advance. In the variation pattern type CA3-2, the variable display effect of “pseudo-continuous” is executed, the variable display state of the decorative symbol is set to the reach state, and then the normal reach is involved. Is a variation pattern type of “normal reach (big hit) pseudo-relation”, and includes a variation pattern PD2-1 associated in advance. The variation pattern type CA3-3 is used when the reach effect ends with the super reach after the variable display state of the decorative symbol is set to the reach state regardless of whether or not the “pseudo-continuous” variable display effect is executed. Is a variation pattern type of “super reach” for deriving and displaying a definite decorative combination of jackpot combination, variation pattern PB2-2 to variation pattern PB2-3, variation pattern PD2-2 to variation pattern associated in advance. PD2-4 is included.

  The variation pattern type CA4-1 is a variation pattern type of “stop the second chance of release” that derives and displays a definite decorative symbol that is one of the second chances of opening, and the variation pattern PC1-1 associated in advance is displayed. Contains. The variation pattern type CA4-2 is a method of deriving and displaying a definite decorative pattern of reach combination after setting the variable display state of the decorative symbol to the reach state when the variable display result is “big hit” and the big hit type is “surprise”. The variation pattern type “open-time reach lose” includes the variation pattern PC1-2 associated in advance.

  The variation pattern type CA5-1 is a “loss” variation pattern type that is defeated by the battle 3 effect in the mission effect and derives and displays a definite decorative pattern of the combination of the loss, and the mission variation pattern PMA-1 associated in advance Is included. The variation pattern type CA5-2 is a variation pattern type of “Mission (no revival)” that wins the battle effect without executing the revival effect in the mission effect and derives and displays a definite decorative combination of the jackpot combination. The associated mission fluctuation pattern PMB-1 to fluctuation pattern PMB-3 are included. The variation pattern type CA5-3 is a variation pattern type of “Mission (with revival)” that executes a revival effect after a battle effect in a mission effect to derive and display a definite decorative combination of a jackpot combination. Mission variation pattern PMC-1 to variation pattern PMC-3, variation pattern PMD-1 to variation pattern PMD-2, and variation pattern PME-1 are included.

  Further, in the ROM 101 provided in the game control microcomputer 100 shown in FIG. 2, the variation pattern is changed to the random value MR3 for determining the variation pattern type according to the determination result of the special figure display result or the determination result of the jackpot type. Based on this, a variation pattern type determination table that is referred to for determining one of a plurality of types is stored.

  8A and 8B show a configuration example of a variation pattern type determination table stored in the ROM 101. FIG. In this embodiment, as the variation pattern type determination table, a big hit variation pattern type determination table shown in FIG. 8 (A) and a small hit variation pattern type determination table shown in FIG. 8 (B) are prepared in advance. Yes.

  The jackpot variation pattern type determination table is a random value for determining the variation pattern type according to the determination result of the jackpot type when it is determined (predetermined) that the special figure display result is “big hit”. This table is referred to in order to determine one of a plurality of types based on MR3. In the jackpot variation pattern type determination table, a numerical value (compared with the random value MR3 for determining the variation pattern type depending on whether the determination result of the jackpot type is “non-probable change”, “probability change”, or “surprise change” ( Determined value) is assigned to any one of the fluctuation pattern type CA3-1 to the fluctuation pattern type CA3-3 and the fluctuation pattern type CA5-2 to the fluctuation pattern type CA5-3.

  In the jackpot variation pattern type determination table, the portion where the decision value is assigned to each variation pattern type so that the ratio determined for each variation pattern type varies depending on which of the multiple types of jackpot types is determined There is. For example, depending on whether the big hit type is “non-probability change” or “probability change”, the variation pattern type CA3-1 to the variation pattern type CA3-3 and the variation pattern type CA5-2 to the variation pattern type CA5-3 Assignment of decision values is different.

  Specifically, when the jackpot type is “non-probable change”, the range from 1 to 39 of the random value MR3 is assigned to the variation pattern type CA3-1, and the range from 40 to 79 of the random value MR3 is assigned. The range from 80 to 219 of the random value MR3 is allocated to the variation pattern type CA3-2, and the range from 220 to 240 of the random value MR3 is allocated to the variation pattern type CA3-3. -2 and the range from 241 to 251 of the random value MR3 is assigned to the variation pattern type CA5-3.

  On the other hand, when the jackpot type is “probable variation”, the range from 1 to 9 of the random value MR3 is assigned to the variation pattern type CA3-1, and the range from 10 to 29 of the random value MR3 is the variation pattern type CA3. -2, the range from 30 to 199 of the random value MR3 is assigned to the variation pattern type CA3-3, and the range from 200 to 219 of the random value MR3 is assigned to the variation pattern type CA5-2. The range from 220 to 251 of the random value MR3 is assigned to the variation pattern type CA5-3.

  Thereby, the ratio determined to the same variation pattern type can be varied according to the determination result as to which of the multiple types of jackpot types. In particular, when the jackpot type is “non-probable change”, the variation pattern type CA5-2 that derives and displays the determined decorative pattern of the jackpot combination without executing the revival effect in the mission effect is the revival effect in the mission effect. The determined value is assigned so as to be determined at a higher rate than the variation pattern type CA5-3, which is executed to derive and display the definite decorative symbol of the jackpot combination. On the other hand, when the jackpot type is “probable change”, the variation pattern type CA5-3 that executes the revival effect in the mission effect and derives and displays the determined decorative combination of the jackpot combination performs the revival effect in the mission effect. Instead, the determined value is assigned so as to be determined at a higher rate than the variation pattern type CA5-2 that derives and displays the determined decorative symbol of the jackpot combination.

  Further, in the jackpot variation pattern type determination table, there is a portion in which determined values are assigned to different variation pattern types depending on which of the plurality of types of jackpot types is determined. For example, when the big hit type is “non-probable change” or “probability change”, the decision is made for the variation pattern type CA3-1 to variation pattern type CA3-3 and variation pattern type CA5-1 to variation pattern type 5-2. While a value is assigned, a decision value is not assigned to the variation pattern type CA4-1 and the variation pattern type CA4-2. On the other hand, when the big hit type is “surprise”, the decision value is assigned to the variation pattern type CA4-1 and the variation pattern type CA4-2, while the variation pattern type CA3-1 to CA4-2. No determination value is assigned to the variation pattern type CA3-3 and the variation pattern type CA5-1 to the variation pattern type 5-2. As a result, when the special figure display result is “big hit” and the big hit type is controlled to the 2 round big hit state according to “surprise”, the variation pattern type different from the case of being controlled to the 15 round big hit state is determined. can do.

  When the big hit type is determined as “non-probability change”, “probability change”, or “surprise change”, depending on whether the game state in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is a normal state, a probability change state, or a short-time state Thus, the assignment of the decision value to each variation pattern type may be made different. Thereby, the ratio determined to the same fluctuation | variation pattern classification can be varied according to which of a plurality of types of gaming states. Also, when the big hit type is determined as “non-probability change”, “probability change”, or “surprise change”, depending on whether the gaming state in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is a normal state, a probability change state, or a short-time state Thus, the determined values may be assigned to different variation pattern types. Thereby, it is possible to determine different variation pattern types depending on which of the plurality of types of gaming states.

  Depending on whether the big hit type is determined to be “non-probable change” or “probability change”, the determination value may be assigned to each variation pattern type. Thereby, the degree of expectation that the variable display result is “15R probability variation big hit” can be varied depending on which variable pattern type includes variable pattern execution. For example, when the jackpot type is “probable change”, a large number of decision values are assigned, while when the jackpot type is “non-probable change”, variable display is performed using a variation pattern included in the variation pattern type to which a small decision value is assigned. In such a case, the degree of expectation that the variable display result is “15R probability variation big hit” is increased.

  The small hit variation pattern type determination table is a table that is referred to for determining the variation pattern type when it is determined (predetermined) that the special figure display result is “small hit”. In the small hit variation pattern type determination table, all numerical values (determination values) to be compared with the random value MR3 for determining the variation pattern type are assigned to the variation pattern type CA4-1. Here, in the big hit fluctuation pattern type determination table, a part of the decision value is assigned to the fluctuation pattern type CA4-1 depending on the case where the big hit type is “surprise”. As described above, the variation pattern type CA4-1 is a common variation pattern type in the case where the big hit type is “surprise” and in the case where the special figure display result is “small hit”. That is, the table data corresponding to the big hit variation pattern type determination table in the big hit variation pattern type determination table and the table data constituting the small hit variation pattern type determination table are set to include a common variation pattern type. Has been. The small hit variation pattern type determination table may be set so that a determination value is assigned to a variation pattern type different from the variation pattern type that can be determined when the big hit type is “surprising”. . In other words, the table data corresponding to the big hit variation pattern type determination table corresponding to “big hit” and the table data constituting the small hit variation pattern type determination table include a common variation pattern type, respectively. May be set to include a unique variation pattern type.

  9A and 9B show a configuration example of a mission variation pattern determination table stored in the ROM 101. FIG. In this embodiment, a mission variation pattern determination table A shown in FIG. 9A and a mission variation pattern determination table B shown in FIG. 9B are prepared in advance as mission variation pattern determination tables. .

  The mission variation pattern determination table A is based on the variation pattern determining random value MR4 when the variation pattern type is determined to be CA5-2 in the jackpot variation pattern type determination table shown in FIG. This table is referred to in order to determine one of a plurality of types. In this mission fluctuation pattern determination table A, the range from 1 to 249 of the random value MR4 is assigned to the fluctuation pattern PMB-1, and the range from 250 to 599 of the random value MR4 is assigned to the fluctuation pattern PMB-2. The range from 600 to 997 of the random value MR4 is assigned to the variation pattern PMB-3.

  The mission variation pattern determination table B is based on the variation pattern determining random number MR4 when the variation pattern type is determined to be CA5-3 in the jackpot variation pattern type determination table shown in FIG. This table is referred to in order to determine one of a plurality of types. In this mission fluctuation pattern determination table B, the range from 1 to 111 of the random value MR4 is assigned to the fluctuation pattern PMC-1, and the range from 112 to 222 of the random value MR4 is assigned to the fluctuation pattern PMC-2. The range from 223 to 332 of the random value MR4 is assigned to the variation pattern PMC-3, the range from 333 to 498 of the random value MR4 is assigned to the variation pattern PMD-1, and the random value The range from 299 to 664 of MR4 is assigned to the variation pattern PMD-2, and the range from 665 to 997 of the random value MR4 is assigned to the variation pattern PME-1.

  As shown in FIG. 10, when the variation pattern type is determined to be CA5-3, the revival effect 1 is executed as the revival effect after the battle 1 effect (the variation pattern is determined to be the variation pattern PMC-1). The ratio P1 is about 11%, the ratio P2 in which the restoration effect 1 is executed as the restoration effect after the battle 2 effect (the fluctuation pattern is determined as the fluctuation pattern PMD-1) is about 17%, The ratio P3 in which the resurrection effect 1 is executed as the resurrection effect after the battle 3 effect (the change pattern is determined as the change pattern PMD-1) is about 33%. That is, in the present embodiment, the ratio of executing the resurrection effect 1 in the mission effect is the highest executed after the battle 3 effect, and the ratio executed after the battle 1 effect is the lowest (P3> P2). > P1).

  That is, in the case where the Toll 3 effect with a long performance period is implemented in the mission effect, the ratio that the revival effect 1 that is a short revival effect is implemented is the battle 1 effect in which the mission effect period is short. Higher than.

  FIG. 11 shows a configuration example of the jackpot type determination table 131 stored in the ROM 101. The jackpot type determination table 131 determines the jackpot type as one of a plurality of types based on the random number MR2 for determining the jackpot type when it is determined that the special figure display result is “big hit” and the game state is controlled to the jackpot game state. This is a table to be referred to. In the jackpot type determination table 131, the special symbol that is variably displayed (changed) in the special symbol game is the first special symbol (the special symbol game by the first special symbol display device 4A) or the second special symbol (second). Depending on whether it is a special symbol game by the special symbol display device 4B, the numerical value (decision value) compared with the random value MR2 for determining the big hit type is a plurality of values such as “non-probability change”, “probability change”, and “surprise change”. Assigned to the type of jackpot type.

  In the setting example of the big hit type determination table 131, the assignment of the decision value to the big hit type of “surprise” differs depending on whether the variation special chart is the first special figure or the second special figure. That is, when the fluctuation special chart is the first special figure, the predetermined value (a value in the range of “83” to “100”) is assigned to the jackpot type of “surprise”, while the fluctuation special figure Is the second special figure, no decision value is assigned to the big hit type of “surprise”. With such a setting, the jackpot type is determined as one of a plurality of types based on the fact that the first start condition for starting the special figure game using the first special figure by the first special symbol display device 4A is satisfied. And determining the jackpot type as one of a plurality of types based on the fact that the second start condition for starting the special figure game using the second special figure by the second special symbol display device 4B is satisfied. Thus, the rate at which the jackpot type is determined to be “surprising” can be varied. In particular, in the special figure game using the second special figure, it is not determined that the big hit type is “surprise” and the short-open big hit state is controlled. In the gaming state where the game ball is likely to enter the second start winning opening formed by 6B, it is possible to avoid the frequent occurrence of the short-term open big hit state where it is difficult to obtain the prize ball, and to prevent a decrease in the game interest due to the extended game .

  Even when the fluctuation special chart is the second special figure, a predetermined range of determined values different from the case where the fluctuation special figure is the first special figure may be assigned to the “surprise” jackpot type. Good. For example, when the fluctuation special chart is the second special figure, a smaller decision value may be assigned to the “surprise” jackpot type than when the fluctuation special chart is the first special figure. Alternatively, regardless of whether the fluctuation special chart is the first special chart or the second special chart, the jackpot type may be determined with reference to the common table data.

  The RAM 102 included in the game control microcomputer 100 shown in FIG. 2 may be a backup RAM that is partially or entirely backed up by a backup power supply created on a predetermined power supply board. That is, even if the power supply to the pachinko gaming machine 1 is stopped, a part or all of the contents of the RAM 102 is stored for a predetermined period (until the capacitor as the backup power supply is discharged and the backup power supply cannot be supplied). The In particular, at least data corresponding to the game state, that is, the control state of the game control means (such as a special figure process flag) and data indicating the number of unpaid prize balls may be stored in the backup RAM. The data corresponding to the control state of the game control means is data necessary for restoring the control state before the occurrence of a power failure or the like based on the data when the power is restored after a power failure or the like occurs. Further, data corresponding to the control state and data indicating the number of unpaid winning balls are defined as data indicating the progress state of the game.

  The RAM 102 is provided with a game control data holding area 150 as shown in FIG. 12, for example, as an area for holding various data used for controlling the progress of the game in the pachinko gaming machine 1. Yes. The game control data holding area 150 shown in FIG. 12 includes a first special figure hold storage unit 151A, a second special figure hold storage unit 151B, a general figure hold storage unit 151C, a game control flag setting unit 152, and a game. A control timer setting unit 153, a game control counter setting unit 154, and a game control buffer setting unit 155 are provided.

  The first special figure reservation storage unit 151A has not started yet although the game ball has passed (entered) through the first start winning opening formed by the normal winning ball apparatus 6A and the start winning (first start winning) has occurred. On-hold data of a special figure game (a special figure game using the first special figure in the first special symbol display device 4A) is stored. As an example, the first special figure reservation storage unit 151A associates the reservation number with the winning order (game ball detection order) to the first start winning opening, and sets the first start condition in the passage (entrance) of the game ball. The random number value MR1 for determining the special figure display result, the random value MR2 for determining the jackpot type, the random value MR3 for determining the variation pattern type, the random value for determining the variation pattern, extracted from the random number circuit 104 or the like by the CPU 103 based on the establishment. Numerical data indicating the numerical value MR4 is stored as pending data until the stored number reaches a predetermined upper limit value (for example, “4”). The hold data stored in the first special figure holding storage unit 151A in this way indicates that the execution of the special figure game using the first special figure is being held, and the variable display result (special figure display) in this special figure game. Based on the (result), it becomes the hold information that makes it possible to determine whether or not a predetermined game value is given.

  The second special figure storage unit 151B has been started although the game ball has passed (entered) through the second start winning opening formed by the normally variable winning ball apparatus 6B and a start winning (second starting winning) has occurred. The reserved data of the special game (not shown special game using the second special figure in the second special symbol display device 4B) is stored. As an example, the second special figure holding storage unit 151B associates with the holding number in the winning order (game ball detection order) to the second start winning opening, The random number value MR1 for determining the special figure display result, the random value MR2 for determining the jackpot type, the random value MR3 for determining the variation pattern type, the random value for determining the variation pattern, extracted from the random number circuit 104 or the like by the CPU 103 based on the establishment. The numerical data indicating the numerical value MR4 is stored as pending data until the number reaches a predetermined upper limit value (for example, “4”). The hold data stored in the second special figure storage unit 151B in this way indicates that the execution of the special figure game using the second special figure is being held, and the variable display result (special figure display) in this special figure game. Based on the (result), it becomes the hold information that makes it possible to determine whether or not a predetermined game value is given.

  Note that the holding information (first holding information) based on the establishment of the first starting condition by passing (entering) the game ball through the first starting winning opening and the gaming ball passing (entering) through the second starting winning opening. Thus, the hold information (second hold information) based on the establishment of the second start winning prize may be stored in association with the hold number in the common hold storage unit. In this case, the start port data indicating whether the game ball has passed (entered) through the first start winning port or the second start winning port may be included in the hold information and stored in association with the hold number. .

  The general-purpose holding storage unit 151C stores the holding information of the general-purpose game that has not yet been started by the normal symbol display 20 even though the game ball that has passed through the passing gate 41 is detected by the gate switch 21. For example, the universal figure storage unit 151C determines the common figure display result extracted from the random number circuit 104 or the like by the CPU 103 based on the passage of the game balls in association with the reservation numbers in the order in which the game balls have passed the passing gate 41. For example, numerical data indicating the random number MR5 is stored as pending data until the number reaches a predetermined upper limit (for example, “4”).

  The game control flag setting unit 152 is provided with a plurality of types of flags that can be updated in accordance with the progress of the game in the pachinko gaming machine 1. For example, the game control flag setting unit 152 stores data indicating a flag value and data indicating an on state or an off state for each of a plurality of types of flags.

  The game control timer setting unit 153 is provided with various timers used for controlling the progress of the game in the pachinko gaming machine 1. For example, the game control timer setting unit 153 stores data indicating timer values in each of a plurality of types of timers.

  The game control counter setting unit 154 is provided with a plurality of types of counters for counting the count values used for controlling the progress of the game in the pachinko gaming machine 1. For example, the game control counter setting unit 154 stores data indicating the count value in each of a plurality of types of counters. Here, the game control counter setting unit 154 may be provided with a random counter for the CPU 103 to count part or all of the game random numbers so that the software 103 can be updated by software.

  For example, in the random counter of the game control counter setting unit 154, numerical data indicating the random number values MR1 to MR5 is stored as a random count value, and each random number is randomly or irregularly set according to the execution of software by the CPU 103. The numerical data indicating the numerical value is updated. The software executed by the CPU 103 to update the random count value may be for updating the random count value separately from the numerical data update operation in the random number circuit 104, or may be extracted from the random number circuit 104. The random count value may be updated by performing predetermined processing such as scramble processing or arithmetic processing on all or part of the numerical data.

  The game control buffer setting unit 155 is provided with various buffers that temporarily store data used for controlling the progress of the game in the pachinko gaming machine 1. For example, the game control buffer setting unit 155 stores data indicating buffer values in each of a plurality of types of buffers.

  The I / O 105 included in the game control microcomputer 100 shown in FIG. 2 has an input port for receiving various signals transmitted to the game control microcomputer 100, and various signals to the outside of the game control microcomputer 100. And an output port for transmission.

  As shown in FIG. 2, the effect control board 12 is provided with an effect control CPU 120 that performs a control operation according to a program, a ROM 121 that stores an effect control program, fixed data, and the like, and a work area for the effect control CPU 120. Random number for updating numerical data indicating random numbers independently of the RAM 122, the display control unit 123 for executing processing for determining the control content of the display operation in the image display device 5, and the effect control CPU 120 A circuit 124 and an I / O 125 are mounted.

  As an example, in the effect control board 12, when the effect control CPU 120 executes an effect control program read from the ROM 121, a process for controlling the effect operation by the effect electric component is executed. At this time, the effect control CPU 120 reads the fixed data from the ROM 121, the effect control CPU 120 writes the various data to the RAM 122 and temporarily stores the data, and the effect control CPU 120 stores the effect data in the RAM 122. Fluctuation data reading operation for reading out various fluctuation data temporarily stored, the reception control CPU 120 for receiving the input of various signals from the outside of the presentation control board 12 via the I / O 125, and the presentation control CPU 120 for I / O A transmission operation for outputting various signals to the outside of the effect control board 12 via O125 is also performed.

  The effect control CPU 120, the ROM 121, and the RAM 122 may be included in a one-chip effect control microcomputer mounted on the effect control board 12.

  In the effect control board 12, wiring for transmitting a video signal to the image display device 5, wiring for transmitting a sound effect signal as an information signal indicating sound number data to the sound control board 13, Wiring for transmitting an electrical decoration signal as an information signal indicating lamp data is connected to the lamp control board 14. Furthermore, on the effect control board 12, wiring for transmitting from the controller sensor unit 35A an operation detection signal as an information signal indicating that the player's operation action on the stick controller 31A has been detected, and a game for the push button 31B. Wiring for transmitting from the push sensor 35B an operation detection signal as an information signal indicating that the user's operation action has been detected is also connected.

  On the effect control board 12, for example, the random number circuit 124 or the like counts the numerical data indicating various random values used for controlling the effect operation so as to be updatable. The random number used for controlling such a production operation is also called a production random number.

  In addition to the effect control program, the ROM 121 mounted on the effect control board 12 shown in FIG. 2 stores various data tables used for controlling the effect operation. For example, the ROM 121 includes a plurality of determination tables prepared for the effect control CPU 120 to perform various determinations, determinations, and settings, table data configuring the determination table, pattern data configuring various effect control patterns, and the like. It is remembered.

  As an example, in the ROM 121, the effect control CPU 120 controls the effect operations by various effect devices (for example, the image display device 5, speakers 8L and 8R, the game effect lamp 9, the decoration LED, the effect model, etc.). An effect control pattern table storing a plurality of types of effect control patterns to be used is stored. The effect control pattern is composed of data indicating the control contents corresponding to various effect operations executed in accordance with the progress of the game in the pachinko gaming machine 1. The effect control pattern table only needs to store, for example, an effect control pattern during special figure change, a notice effect control pattern, and various effect control patterns.

  The special-control variation production control pattern corresponds to a plurality of types of variation patterns in the period from the start of the variation of the special symbol in the special-sign game until the finalized special symbol that is the special-sign display result is derived and displayed. Consists of data indicating the contents of control of various effect operations, such as effect display operations in decorative symbol variable display operations, reach effects, re-lottery effects, etc., or various effect display operations that do not involve variable display of decorative symbols Has been. The notice effect control pattern is composed of data indicating the control content of the effect operation that becomes the notice effect executed in response to the notice pattern in which a plurality of patterns are prepared in advance. The various effect control patterns are composed of data indicating the control contents corresponding to various effect operations executed in accordance with the progress of the game in the pachinko gaming machine 1.

  In the special-figure variation production control pattern, for example, a plurality of types of reach production control patterns with different production modes in each reach production may be included for each variation pattern that executes the reach production.

  FIG. 13A shows a configuration example of the effect control pattern. Each effect control pattern, such as a special control change effect control pattern and various effect control patterns, includes, for example, an effect control process timer determination value, display control data, sound control data, lamp control data, operation detection control data, and an end code. It is composed of control data for controlling various performance operations, and it is only necessary to set the contents of various performance controls, the timing of switching the performance control, and the like in time series. In addition, the effect control pattern may include, for example, movable member control data for designating the content of operation control in a movable member provided inside or outside the game area. The effect control process timer determination value is a value (determination value) to be compared with the value of the effect control process timer (effect control process timer value) provided in a predetermined area of the effect control RAM incorporated in the effect control microcomputer. And the judgment value corresponding to the execution time (effect time) of each effect operation is preset. In place of the effect control process timer determination value, for example, a predetermined effect control command is received from the main board 11, or a predetermined process is executed as a process for controlling the effect operation in the effect control microcomputer. In other words, data indicating the switching timing of the production control or the like may be set corresponding to predetermined control content or processing content.

  The display control data includes data indicating the display mode of the effect image in the display area of the image display device 5, such as data indicating the variation mode of each decorative pattern during variable display of the decorative pattern. That is, the display control data is data that designates the display operation of the effect image in the display area of the image display device 5. The voice control data includes data indicating the voice output mode from the speakers 8L and 8R, such as data indicating the output mode of sound effects in conjunction with the variable display operation of the decorative symbol during variable display of the decorative symbol, for example. Yes. That is, the audio control data is data that designates an audio output operation from the speakers 8L and 8R. The lamp control data includes data indicating the lighting operation mode of the light emitter, such as a game effect lamp 9 and a decoration LED. That is, the lamp control data is data for designating the lighting operation of the light emitter. The operation detection control data includes, for example, data indicating a period during which an operation on the operation unit such as the operation button 30 is effectively detected, control contents of the rendering operation when the operation is detected effectively, and the like. That is, the operation detection control data is data that designates an effect operation corresponding to an operation on the operation unit. Note that these control data do not have to be included in all the effect control patterns, but an effect control pattern configured to include a part of the control data according to the contents of the effect operation by each effect control pattern. There may be.

  FIG. 13B is a diagram for explaining various rendering operations executed according to the contents of the rendering control pattern. The production control CPU 120 determines the control content of the production operation according to various control data included in the production control pattern. For example, when the effect control process timer value matches one of the effect control process timer determination values, the decorative design is displayed in a manner specified by the display control data associated with the effect control process timer determination value, and the character Control is performed to display effect images such as images and background images on the screen of the image display device 5. In addition, control is performed to output sound from the speakers 8L and 8R in a manner specified by the sound control data, and control is performed to blink a light emitter such as a game effect lamp 9 or a decoration LED in a manner specified by the lamp control data. Control is performed to determine the content of the effect by accepting an operation on the stick controller 31A or the push button 31B in the operation valid period specified by the operation detection control data. Note that dummy data (data not specifying control) may be set as data corresponding to a production component that does not become a control target even though it corresponds to the production control process timer determination value.

  The rendering operation shown in FIG. 13B corresponds to the entire period from the start of the change of the decorative design to the final stop, but is not limited to this, and during the variable display of the decorative design An effect control pattern for executing an effect operation corresponding to a part of the period (for example, a period of executing the notice effect) may be provided. Alternatively, in order to execute the presentation operation corresponding to a predetermined period other than the variable display of the decorative symbols (for example, a period in which a round is being executed in the jackpot gaming state, a period in which an ending effect is executed at the end of the jackpot gaming state, etc.) The effect control pattern may be provided.

  The effect control CPU 120 sets an effect control pattern (special-figure variation effect control pattern) based on the variation pattern indicated in the variation pattern designation command, for example, when starting variable display of decorative symbols. The effect control CPU 120 sets a corresponding effect control pattern (notice effect control pattern), for example, when execution of a predetermined effect such as a notice effect is started. Here, when setting the effect control pattern, the pattern data constituting the corresponding effect control pattern may be read from the ROM 121 and temporarily stored in a predetermined area of the RAM 122, or the corresponding effect control pattern is configured. The storage address of the pattern data in the ROM 121 may be temporarily stored in a predetermined area of the RAM 122, and the reading position of the storage data in the ROM 121 may be designated. After that, every time the production control process timer value is updated, it is determined whether or not it matches any of the production control process timer judgment values. If they match, the production operation according to the corresponding various control data Control. As described above, the effect control CPU 120 performs the effect devices (the image display device 5, the speakers 8L and 8R, the game) according to the contents of the process data # 1 to process data #n (n is an arbitrary integer) included in the effect control pattern. The control of the effect lamp 9 and a light emitting body such as a decoration LED, a movable member provided in the production model, etc. is advanced. In each process data # 1 to process data #n, display control data # 1 to display control data #n and voice control data # 1 to voice control associated with production control process timer determination values # 1 to #n are provided. Data #n, lamp control data # 1 to lamp control data #n, and operation detection control data # 1 to operation detection control data #n indicate the control content of the rendering operation in the rendering device and specify the execution of the rendering control. Control execution data # 1 to production control execution data #n are configured.

  A command according to the effect control pattern set in this way is output from the effect control CPU 120 to the display control unit 123, the sound control board 13, and the like. In the display control unit 123 that has received a command from the effect control CPU 120, for example, a predetermined VDP or the like is developed by reading out image data indicated by the command from an image data memory such as CGROM and temporarily storing it in the VRAM. On the voice control board 13 that has received a command from the effect control CPU 120, for example, the voice synthesis IC reads out the voice data indicated by the command from the voice data ROM and temporarily stores it in the voice RAM or the like. .

  In the RAM 122 mounted on the effect control board 12 shown in FIG. 2, for example, an effect control data holding area 190 as shown in FIG. 14A is used as an area for holding various data used for controlling the effect operation. Is provided. The effect control data holding area 190 shown in FIG. 14A includes an effect control flag setting unit 191, an effect control timer setting unit 192, an effect control counter setting unit 193, and an effect control buffer setting unit 194. Yes.

  The effect control flag setting unit 191 has a plurality of types whose states can be updated according to the effect operation state such as the display state of the effect image on the screen of the image display device 5, the effect control command transmitted from the main board 11, and the like. The flag is provided. For example, the effect control flag setting unit 191 stores data indicating the value of the flag and data indicating the on state or the off state for each of the plurality of types of flags.

  The effect control timer setting unit 192 is provided with a plurality of types of timers used for controlling the progress of various effect operations such as, for example, an effect image display operation on the screen of the image display device 5. For example, the production control timer setting unit 192 stores data indicating timer values in each of a plurality of types of timers.

  The effect control counter setting unit 193 is provided with a plurality of types of counters used for controlling the progress of various effect operations. For example, the production control counter setting unit 193 stores data indicating the count value in each of a plurality of types of counters.

  The effect control buffer setting unit 194 is provided with various buffers that temporarily store data used for controlling the progress of various effect operations. For example, the effect control buffer setting unit 194 stores data indicating buffer values in each of a plurality of types of buffers.

  In this embodiment, data constituting the start winning reception command buffer 194A as shown in FIG. 14B is stored in a predetermined area of the effect control buffer setting unit 194. The receiving command buffer 194A at the time of starting winning is provided with a storage area (an area corresponding to buffer numbers “1” to “8”) corresponding to the maximum value (for example, “8”) of the total reserved storage number. When there is a start prize at the first start prize opening or the second start prize opening, a start opening prize designation command (first start slot prize designation command or second start slot prize designation command), symbol designation command, variable category command , And a reserved memory number notification command (first reserved memory number notification command or second reserved memory number notification command) are set as one set and transmitted from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12. In the start winning reception command buffer 194A, a storage area is secured so that these start opening winning designation commands, symbol designation commands, variable category commands, and pending storage number notification commands can be stored in association with each other.

  The effect control CPU 120 stores the commands in the order received at the start winning prize from the head in the empty area of the start winning reception command buffer 194A. At the time of starting winning a prize, command transmission is performed in the order of a starting opening winning designation command, a symbol designation command, a variable category command, and a reserved memory count notification command. Therefore, if the command is received normally, as shown in FIG. 14 (B), the start opening prize designation command, the symbol designation command, the fluctuation are stored in the storage areas corresponding to the buffer numbers “1” to “8”. The category command and the stored memory number notification command are stored in this order. In FIG. 14B, commands are stored in storage areas corresponding to buffer numbers “1” to “5”.

  The command stored in the start winning reception command buffer 194A shown in FIG. 14B is the first storage area (area corresponding to the buffer number “1”) each time variable symbol display is started. Is deleted from the stored contents, and the stored contents thereafter are shifted. For example, in the storage state shown in FIG. 14B, when the variable display of a new decorative symbol is started, each command stored in the buffer number “1” is deleted, and the command corresponding to the buffer number “2” is deleted. Each command stored in the area is shifted to the area corresponding to the buffer number “1”, and each command stored in the area corresponding to each of the buffer numbers “3” to “5” is changed to the buffer number. The region is shifted to a region corresponding to “2” to “4”. In the start winning reception command buffer 194A shown in FIG. 14 (B), the command corresponding to the buffer number “2” cannot be normally received, and an example in which the pending storage number notification command is missed is shown. Has been. Therefore, in the example shown in FIG. 14B, the content in the fourth storage area where the reserved storage number notification command should be stored is “0000 (H)”, corresponding to the buffer number “2”. It remains.

  Whether or not to execute the pre-reading notice effect based on the start winning command (start opening winning designation command, symbol designation command, variable category command and pending memory number notification command) stored in the start winning reception command buffer 194A Or, a pre-reading notice pattern for execution is determined. At this time, if the command at the time of starting winning is missed or inconsistent, the pre-reading notice effect setting is not performed until the variable information of the hold information corresponding to those commands is executed (digested). Limited to When a command for starting a prize is received during a period in which the setting of the pre-reading notice effect is restricted (during pre-reading notice restriction), the pre-reading notice effect setting is not performed at that reception timing. The determination information is set to “1” (or on state). In the case of restricting the execution of the pre-reading notice effect, the pre-reading notice effect of all aspects may not be executed for the pre-reading notice effect that targets the variable display corresponding to the start winning that occurred within a predetermined period. Alternatively, the pre-reading notice effect of some aspects may not be executed.

  Next, the operation (action) of the pachinko gaming machine 1 in this embodiment will be described.

  In the main board 11, when power supply from a predetermined power supply board is started, the game control microcomputer 100 is activated, and the CPU 103 executes a predetermined process as a game control main process. When the game control main process is started, the CPU 103 performs the necessary initial setting after setting the interrupt prohibition. In this initial setting, for example, the RAM 102 is cleared. Also, register setting of a CTC (counter / timer circuit) built in the game control microcomputer 100 is performed. Thereby, thereafter, an interrupt request signal is sent from the CTC to the CPU 103 every predetermined time (for example, 2 milliseconds), and the CPU 103 can periodically execute timer interrupt processing. When the initial setting is completed, an interrupt is permitted and then loop processing is started. In the game control main process, a process for returning the internal state of the pachinko gaming machine 1 to the state at the time of the previous power supply stop may be executed before entering the loop process.

  When the CPU 103 that has executed such a game control main process receives an interrupt request signal from the CTC and receives an interrupt request, it executes the game control timer interrupt process shown in the flowchart of FIG. When the game control timer interrupt process shown in FIG. 15 is started, the CPU 103 first executes a predetermined switch process, thereby causing the gate switch 21, the first start port switch 22A, and the second start port to pass through the switch circuit 110. The state of detection signals input from various switches such as the switch 22B and the count switch 23 is determined (step S11). Subsequently, by executing predetermined main-side error processing, abnormality diagnosis of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is performed, and if necessary, a warning can be generated according to the diagnosis result (step S12). After that, by executing a predetermined information output process, for example, data such as jackpot information, starting information, probability variation information supplied to a hall management computer installed outside the pachinko gaming machine 1 is output (step) S13).

  Following the information output process, a game random number update process for updating at least a part of the game random numbers such as random number values MR1 to MR5 used on the main board 11 side by software is executed (step S14). Thereafter, the CPU 103 executes special symbol process processing (step S15). In the special symbol process, the value of the special symbol process flag provided in the game control flag setting unit 152 is updated according to the progress of the game in the pachinko gaming machine 1, and the first special symbol display device 4A or the second special symbol is processed. Various processes are selected and executed in order to perform control of display operation in the display device 4B and setting of opening / closing operation of the special winning opening in the special variable winning ball device 7 in a predetermined procedure.

  Following the special symbol process, the normal symbol process is executed (step S16). The CPU 103 controls the display operation (for example, turning on / off the segment LED, etc.) on the normal symbol display 20 by executing the normal symbol process, so that the variable display of the normal symbol and the normal variable winning ball apparatus 6B are movable. Enables setting of the tilting movement of the blade.

  After executing the normal symbol process, the CPU 103 transmits a control command from the main board 11 to a sub-side control board such as the effect control board 12 by executing the command control process (step S17). As an example, in the command control process, the effect control among the output ports included in the I / O 105 corresponding to the setting in the command transmission table specified by the value of the transmission command buffer provided in the game control buffer setting unit 155. After setting the control data in the output port for transmitting the effect control command to the board 12, the predetermined control data is set in the output port of the effect control INT signal and the effect control INT signal is turned on for a predetermined time. By changing the state to the off state, the presentation control command can be transmitted based on the setting in the command transmission table. After executing the command control process, after setting the interrupt enabled state, the game control timer interrupt process is terminated.

  FIG. 16 is a flowchart showing an example of processing executed in step S15 shown in FIG. 15 as special symbol process processing. In this special symbol process, the CPU 103 first executes a start winning determination process (step S101). FIG. 17 is a flowchart illustrating an example of a process executed in step S101 of FIG. 16 as the start winning determination process.

  In the start winning determination process shown in FIG. 17, the CPU 103 first determines the first based on the detection signal from the first start opening switch 22A provided corresponding to the first start winning opening formed by the normal winning ball apparatus 6A. It is determined whether or not the start port switch 22A is on (step S201). At this time, if the first start port switch 22A is on (step S201; Yes), the first special figure holding memory number that is the holding memory number of the special figure game using the first special figure is a predetermined upper limit value. It is determined whether or not (for example, “4” as the upper limit storage number) (step S202). For example, the CPU 103 only needs to be able to identify the first special figure reserved memory number by reading the first reserved memory number count value that is the stored value of the first reserved memory number counter provided in the game control counter setting unit 154. When the number of first special figure reservation storage is not the upper limit value in step S202 (step S202; No), for example, the stored value of the start port buffer provided in the game control buffer setting unit 155 is set to “1” ( Step S203).

  When the first start-up switch 22A is OFF in step S201 (step S201; No), or when the first special figure reservation storage number reaches the upper limit value in step S202 (step S202; Yes), it is normal. It is determined whether or not the second start port switch 22B is on based on a detection signal from the second start port switch 22B provided corresponding to the second start winning port formed by the variable winning ball apparatus 6B ( Step S204). At this time, if the second start port switch 22B is ON (step S204; Yes), the second special figure holding memory number that is the holding memory number of the special figure game using the second special figure is a predetermined upper limit value. It is determined whether or not (for example, “4” as the upper limit storage number) (step S205). The CPU 103 only needs to be able to specify the second special figure reserved memory number by reading the second reserved memory number count value, which is the stored value of the second reserved memory number counter provided in the game control counter setting unit 154, for example. When the second special figure holding storage number is not the upper limit value in step S205 (step S205; No), for example, the stored value of the start port buffer provided in the game control buffer setting unit 155 is set to “2” ( Step S206).

  After either of the processes of steps S203 and S206 is executed, the special figure hold storage number corresponding to the start port buffer value that is the stored value of the start port buffer is updated to be incremented by 1 (step S207). For example, when the starting port buffer value is “1”, the first reserved memory number count value is incremented by 1, while when the starting port buffer value is “2”, the second reserved memory number count value is incremented by one. Thus, the first reserved memory number count value is 1 when the game ball passes (enters) the first start winning opening and the first start condition corresponding to the special figure game using the first special figure is satisfied. Updated to increase. Further, the second reserved memory number count value is 1 when the game ball passes (enters) the second start winning opening and the second start condition corresponding to the special figure game using the second special figure is satisfied. Updated to increase. At this time, the total pending storage number is updated so as to be incremented by 1 (step S208). For example, the total reserved memory number count value, which is the stored value of the total reserved memory number counter provided in the game control counter setting unit 154, may be updated to add one.

  After executing the process of step S208, the CPU 103 determines the random number MR1 for determining the special figure display result and the jackpot type from the numerical data updated by the random counter of the random number circuit 104 or the game control counter setting unit 154. The numerical data indicating the random number value MR2, the random value MR3 for determining the variation pattern type, and the random value MR4 for determining the variation pattern are extracted (step S209). The numerical data indicating each random number extracted in this way is stored by being set as hold information at the head of the empty entry in the special figure hold storage unit corresponding to the start port buffer value (step S210). For example, when the starting port buffer value is “1”, numerical data indicating the random number values MR1 to MR4 is set in the first special figure reservation storage unit 151A, while when the starting port buffer value is “2”, Numerical data indicating the random number values MR1 to MR4 is set in the second special figure storage unit 151B.

  The numerical data indicating the random number value MR1 for determining the special figure display result and the random number value MR2 for determining the big hit type indicate whether the variable symbol display result of the special symbol or the decorative symbol is “big hit” or “small hit”, Is used to determine the jackpot type when the variable display result is “big jackpot”. The random value MR3 for determining the variation pattern type is used to determine the variation display mode of the variation pattern. The random number MR4 for determining the variation pattern is used to determine a variation pattern including a variable symbol display time for special symbols and decorative symbols. The CPU 103 executes the process of step S209 to obtain numerical data indicating a part or all of the random number values used for determining the variable display mode including the variable display result and the variable display time of the special symbol and the decorative symbol. Extract.

  Subsequent to the process of step S210, transmission setting of a start port winning designation command corresponding to the start port buffer value is performed (step S211). For example, when the starting port buffer value is “1”, the storage address of the first starting port winning designation command table in the ROM 101 is stored in the buffer area designated by the transmission command pointer in the transmission command buffer. 12 is set to transmit a first start opening winning designation command. On the other hand, when the starting port buffer value is “2”, the storage address of the second starting port winning designation command table in the ROM 101 is stored in the buffer area of the transmission command buffer. Setting for transmitting the second start opening winning designation command is performed. The start opening winning designation command set in this way is performed from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12 by executing the command control process of step S17 shown in FIG. 15 after the special symbol process process is completed, for example. Is transmitted.

  Following the process of step S211, a winning random number determination process is executed (step S212). Thereafter, for example, by storing the storage address of the reserved storage number notification command table in the ROM 101 in the buffer area designated by the transmission command pointer in the transmission command buffer, the reserved storage number notification command is transmitted to the effect control board 12. For this purpose (step S213). The reserved memory number notification command set in this way is performed from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12 by executing the command control process in step S17 shown in FIG. Is transmitted.

  After executing the process of step S213, it is determined whether the start port buffer value is “1” or “2” (step S214). At this time, if the start port buffer value is “1” (step S214; “1”), the start port buffer is cleared and the stored value is initialized to “0” (step S215), and then step S204. Proceed to the process. On the other hand, when the starting port buffer value is “2” (step S214; “2”), the starting port buffer is cleared and its stored value is initialized to “0” (step S216). The start winning determination process is terminated. Thereby, even when both the first start port switch 22A and the second start port switch 22B detect the start winning of the game balls that are effective at the same time, the processing based on the detection of both effective start winnings can be completed reliably.

  FIG. 18A is a flowchart illustrating an example of a process executed in step S212 in FIG. 17 as the winning random number determination process. In this embodiment, when variable display of special symbols and decorative symbols is started, special symbol display results (variable display results of special symbols) are displayed as “big hits” by special symbol normal processing (step S110 in FIG. 16) described later. ”Or“ small hit ”is determined whether to control to the big hit gaming state or the small hit gaming state. Further, in a variation pattern setting process (step S111 in FIG. 16) to be described later, a variation pattern that specifically defines the variable display mode of the decorative symbols is determined. On the other hand, separately from these determinations, the CPU 103 executes the winning random number determination process in step S212 at the timing when the game ball is detected at the starting winning opening (first starting winning opening or second starting winning opening). As a result, it is determined whether or not it is the random value MR1 determined to derive and display the big hit symbol or the small hit symbol as the special figure display result, and whether the variable display mode of the decorative symbol becomes a predetermined display mode with super reach. Determine whether or not. As a result, before the variable display of the special symbols and decorative symbols based on the detection of the game ball that has entered the start winning opening is started, the special graphic display result becomes “big hit” or “small hit” It is predicted that the variable display mode of the symbol will be a predetermined display mode, and based on this prediction result, it is determined on the side of the production control board 12 by the production control CPU 120 or the like whether or not to perform the pre-reading notice production. be able to.

  In the winning random number determination process shown in FIG. 18 (A), the CPU 103 first checks the state of the time reduction flag or the probability variation flag provided in the game control flag setting unit 152, for example, to check the pachinko gaming machine 1 The current gaming state at is identified (step S401). The CPU 103 identifies the probability variation state when the probability variation flag is on, identifies the time variation state when the probability variation flag is off and the time reduction flag is on, and both the probability variation flag and the time reduction flag are off. Sometimes it is sufficient to identify the normal state.

  Subsequent to the processing of step S401, from the table data constituting the first special figure display result determination table 130A or the second special figure display result determination table 130B, the starting port buffer value (“1” or “2”) and the current Corresponding to the gaming state, the special figure display result determination table data used for determining the special figure display result is selected (step S402). Thereafter, it is determined whether or not the numerical data indicating the random number value MR1 for determining the special figure display result extracted in step S209 in FIG. 17 is within a predetermined jackpot determination range (step S403). In the big hit determination range, individual decision values assigned to the special figure display result of “big hit” in the special figure display result decision table data selected by the processing of step S402 are set, and the CPU 103 sets the random value MR1 and each It suffices to determine whether or not there is a decision value that matches the random value MR1 by comparing the decision value with each other. Alternatively, a numerical value indicating the minimum value (lower limit value) and the maximum value (upper limit value) of the determination value included in the jackpot determination range is set, and the CPU 103 determines the random number MR1 and the minimum value or maximum value of the jackpot determination range. It is only necessary to determine whether or not the random value MR1 is within the range of the jackpot determination range by comparison. At this time, when it is determined that the random value MR1 is within the range of the jackpot determination range, it is determined that the variable display result based on the pending data including the random value MR1 is determined to be “big hit” (big hit start determination) it can.

  If it is determined in step S403 that it is not within the big hit determination range (step S403; No), it is determined whether or not the numerical data indicating the random value MR1 is within a predetermined small hit determination range (step S403). S404). The CPU 103 executes processing similar to that in the case of the big hit determination range with respect to the decision value assigned to the special figure display result of “small hit” in the special figure display result determination table data selected in step S402. Thus, it is only necessary to determine whether or not the random value MR1 is within the small hit determination range. If it is determined in step S404 that it is not within the small hit determination range (step S404; No), a symbol designating command corresponding to the case where the variable display result is “lost” is sent to the effect control board 12. Settings for transmission are performed (step S405). As an example, the CPU 103 may set a command table for setting the EXT data in the symbol designating command to “00H”.

  If it is determined in step S404 that it is within the small hit determination range (step S404; Yes), a symbol designation command corresponding to the case where the variable display result is “small hit” is given to the effect control board 12. Are set for transmission (step S407). As an example, the CPU 103 may set a command table for setting the EXT data in the symbol designating command to “04H”.

  If it is determined in step S403 that it is within the jackpot determination range (step S403; Yes), the jackpot type is determined based on the random number MR2 for determining the jackpot type (step S409). At this time, the CPU 103 responds according to the fluctuation special figure corresponding to the start port buffer value ("first special figure" corresponding to "1" or "second special figure" corresponding to "2"). The big hit type determination table data is selected from the table data constituting the big hit type determination table 131. Then, by referring to the selected jackpot type determination table data, it is determined which of the plurality of jackpot types is determined. Settings for transmitting the symbol designation command corresponding to the determination result of the process in step S409 to the effect control board 12 are performed (step S410). As an example, when it is determined in step S409 that the jackpot type is determined to be “probable change”, the EXT data in the symbol designating command is set to “01H”, and it is determined that the jackpot type is determined to be “non-probable change”. For example, if it is determined that the EXT data in the symbol designating command is “02H” and the jackpot type is determined to be “surprise”, a command table for setting the EXT data in the symbol designating command to “03H” is set. That's fine.

  After executing any of the processes of steps S405, S407, and S410, numerical data indicating the random value MR3 for determining the variation pattern type, the random value MR4 for determining the variation pattern, and the variation pattern type stored in the ROM 101 Using the determination table and the variation pattern determination table stored in the ROM 101, a variation category corresponding to the range of determination values including the random number values MR3 and MR4 is determined (step S412).

  In step S412, for example, a variation pattern type determination table and a variation pattern determination table are set, and it is determined which variation pattern type is determined as the variation category. When the variation pattern is any one of PA1-1 to PA1-5, it is determined that the variation category is non-reach loss. Further, when the variation pattern is any one of PA2-1 to PA2-3, it is determined that it is a reach-losing variation category. When the variation pattern is any one of PB1-1 to PB1-3, it is determined that the variation category is a reach big hit. Further, when the variation pattern is either PC1-1 or PC1-2, it is determined that the variation category is a sudden / small hit variation category. In step S412, it is determined whether the variation category is included in the variation category of non-reach loss, reach loss, reach big hit, or sudden hit / small hit, but a finer determination may be made. For example, in the case of a variation pattern with reach, it may be determined that the variation category differs depending on whether it is normal reach or super reach.

  Thereafter, according to the determination result of the process of step S412, after making a setting for transmitting any of the variation category commands shown in FIG. 18B to the effect control board 12 (step S413), a prize is received. The random number value determination process ends.

  In the starting winning determination process shown in FIG. 17 and the winning random number determination process shown in FIG. 18 (A), after the process of step S211 in FIG. By executing the numerical value determination process, the processes of steps S405, S407, S410, and S413 in FIG. 18A are executed, and the process of step S214 in FIG. 17 is further executed. After these processes are executed, the command control process of step S17 shown in FIG. 15 is executed, so that the game ball passes (enters) the first start winning opening and the second starting winning opening, and the first start condition Or when the second start condition is satisfied, a start opening winning designation command (first starting opening winning designation command or second starting opening winning designation command), a symbol designation command, a variable category command, a reserved memory count notification command (first hold) Four commands called a storage count notification command or a second pending storage count notification command) are collectively transmitted within one timer interrupt as one set. Note that the commands are not limited to those that are transmitted all at once in one timer interrupt, and commands may be sequentially transmitted one by one by the command control process in step S17 for each timer interrupt.

  After executing the start winning determination process at step S101 in FIG. And run.

  The special symbol normal process in step S110 is executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is “0”. In this special symbol normal processing, the first special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol are based on the presence / absence of reserved data stored in the first special symbol reservation storage unit 151A and the second special diagram reservation storage unit 151B. It is determined whether or not to start the special game using the display device 4B. In the special symbol normal process, whether or not the variable symbol display result of the special symbol or the decorative symbol is set to “big hit” or “small hit” based on the numerical data indicating the random value MR1 for determining the special symbol display result. It is determined (predetermined) before the variable display result is derived and displayed. Further, in the special symbol normal process, in response to the variable display result of the special symbol in the special symbol game, the confirmed special symbol (big hit symbol or the like in the special symbol game by the first special symbol display device 4A or the second special symbol display device 4B). Either a small hit symbol or a lost symbol) is set. In the special symbol normal process, the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to “1” when the variable display result of the special symbol or the decorative symbol is determined in advance.

  The variation pattern setting process in step S111 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is “1”. In this variation pattern setting process, the random value MR4 for determining the variation pattern is determined based on the pre-determined result on whether the variable display result is “big hit” or “small hit”, the total number of reserved memories, the gaming state, and the like. This includes processing for determining the variation pattern to one of a plurality of types shown in FIG. 5 using the numerical data shown. When the variation pattern setting process is executed and the variable symbol special display is started, the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to “2”.

  By the special symbol normal processing in step S110 and the variation pattern setting processing in step S111, a fixed special symbol that results in variable display of the special symbol and a variation pattern including the variable symbol display time of the special symbol and the decorative symbol are determined. That is, the special symbol normal processing and the variation pattern setting processing use the special symbol or decoration using the random value MR1 for determining the special diagram display result, the random value MR2 for determining the jackpot type, and the random value MR3 for determining the variation pattern type. The process of determining the variable display mode of the symbol is included.

  The special symbol variation process in step S112 is executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is “2”. The special symbol variation process includes a process for performing setting for varying the special symbol in the first special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol display device 4B, and an elapsed time after the special symbol starts to vary. This includes the process of measuring. For example, every time the special symbol variation process of step S112 is executed, the special diagram variation timer value, which is a stored value in the special diagram variation timer provided in the game control timer setting unit 153, is subtracted or added by 1, Regardless of whether the game is a special game using the first special symbol in the first special symbol display device 4A or a special game using the second special symbol in the second special symbol display device 4B, The elapsed time is measured. Further, it is also determined whether or not the measured elapsed time has reached a special figure fluctuation time corresponding to the fluctuation pattern. As described above, the special symbol variation process in step S112 is performed in the special symbol variation in the special symbol game using the first special symbol in the first special symbol display device 4A or the second special symbol display device 4B in the second special symbol display device 4B. It suffices if it is a process for controlling the variation of the special symbol in the special figure game using the figure by a common processing routine. When the elapsed time since the start of the special symbol variation reaches the special symbol variation time, the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to “3”.

  The special symbol stop process in step S113 is executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is “3”. In the special symbol stop process, the first special symbol display device 4A or the second special symbol display device 4B stops the variation of the special symbol, and the fixed special symbol that is the variable symbol display result is stopped and displayed (derived). A process for performing the setting is included. Then, it is determined whether or not the jackpot flag provided in the game control flag setting unit 152 is turned on. When the jackpot flag is turned on, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to “4”. Is done. On the other hand, when the big hit flag is off and the small hit flag is on, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to “8”. When both the big hit flag and the small hit flag are off, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to “0”.

  The big hit release pre-processing in step S114 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is “4”. This big hit release pre-processing includes a process for starting the execution of the round in the big hit gaming state and setting the big winning opening to the open state based on the fact that the variable display result becomes “big hit”, etc. include. In this case, for example, the upper limit of the period during which the big winning opening is opened may be set in accordance with whether the big hit type is “non-probability change”, “probability change”, or “surprise change”. For example, in response to the big hit type of “non-probability change” or “probability change”, the upper limit of the period during which the big winning opening is opened is set to “29 seconds” and the upper prize is set to the upper limit number of times to execute the round. By setting the number of times of opening the mouth to “15 times”, it is only necessary to set the normal open big hit state. On the other hand, corresponding to the big hit type “surprise”, the upper limit of the period during which the big winning opening is opened is set to “0.1 second”, and the number of opening of the big winning opening that becomes the upper limit number of times to execute the round is set. Is set to “15 times” to set the short-term open big hit state. At this time, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to “5”.

  The big hit release processing in step S115 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is "5". The big hit opening process includes a process for measuring an elapsed time after the big winning opening is opened, a number of game balls detected by the measured elapsed time and the count switch 23, and the like. The process etc. which determine whether it became the timing which returns to a closed state from an open state are included. Then, when returning the special winning opening to the closed state, after performing processing for stopping the supply of the solenoid driving signal to the special winning opening door solenoid 82, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to “6”. .

  The big hit release post-processing in step S116 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is “6”. In this post-hit opening process, the process of determining whether or not the number of rounds in which the winning opening is in the open state has reached the maximum number of opening of the big winning opening, or the maximum number of opening of the big winning opening has been reached. In some cases, processing for setting to transmit a jackpot end designation command is included. When the number of round executions has not reached the maximum value of the number of times of winning the special winning opening, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to “5”. The value of the process flag is updated to “7”.

  The big hit end process in step S117 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is “7”. In the jackpot end process, a waiting time corresponding to a period in which an ending effect as an effect operation for notifying the end of the jackpot game state is executed by an effect device such as the image display device 5, the speakers 8L and 8R, the game effect lamp 9 or the like. A process of waiting until time elapses, a process of performing various settings for starting the probability variation control and the time reduction control in response to the end of the big hit gaming state, and the like are included. When such setting is performed, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to “0”.

  The small hit pre-release process in step S118 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is “8”. The pre-opening process for small hits includes a process for setting the big winning opening in the small hit game state based on the fact that the variable display result is “small hit”. As an example, when the variable display result is “small hit”, the upper limit of the period during which the big winning opening is opened is the same as when the variable display result is “big hit” and the big hit type is “surprise”. Setting to “0.1 seconds” and setting the number of times of opening of the big winning opening to “15 times” may be performed so that the small hit gaming state is set. At this time, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to “9”.

  The small hit releasing process in step S119 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is “9”. In the small hit opening process, the process for measuring the elapsed time since the big prize opening is in the open state, and the timing for returning the big prize opening from the open state to the closed state based on the measured elapsed time, etc. The process etc. which determine whether or not were included are included. When returning the big prize opening to the closed state, a process for stopping the supply of the drive signal to the solenoid 82 for the big prize opening door may be executed.

  The small hit end process in step S120 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is “10”. In this small hit end process, there is a waiting time corresponding to a period during which a presentation operation for informing the end of the small hit gaming state is performed by an effect device such as the image display device 5, the speakers 8L and 8R, the game effect lamp 9 or the like. Processing that waits until the time has passed is included. Here, when the small hit gaming state is finished, the state of the pachinko gaming machine 1 before the small hit gaming state is continued without changing the state of the probability change flag and the short time flag. When the waiting time at the end of the small hit gaming state has elapsed, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to “0”.

  FIG. 19 is a flowchart showing an example of the process executed in step S110 of FIG. 16 as the special symbol normal process. In the special symbol normal process shown in FIG. 19, the CPU 103 first determines whether or not the second special figure holding storage number is “0” (step S <b> 231). The second special figure reserved memory number is the reserved memory number of the special figure game using the second special figure by the second special symbol display device 4B. For example, in the process of step S231, the second reserved storage number count value stored in the game control counter setting unit 154 may be read and it may be determined whether or not the read value is “0”.

  When the second special figure reservation storage number is other than “0” in step S231 (step S231; No), the second special figure reservation storage unit 151B stores the correspondence corresponding to the reservation number “1”. As the data, numerical data indicating the random number value MR1 for determining the special figure display result, the random value MR2 for determining the jackpot type, the random value MR3 for determining the variation pattern type, and the random value MR4 for determining the variation pattern are read out (step) S232). The numerical data read at this time may be temporarily stored, for example, in a random number buffer for variation.

  Subsequent to the processing of step S232, for example, by subtracting and updating the second reserved memory number count value by 1, etc., the second special figure reserved memory number is updated by 1 and the second special figure reserved memory is also updated. The hold data indicating the random number values MR1 to MR4 stored in the entries lower than the hold number “1” (for example, the entries corresponding to the hold numbers “2” to “4”) are shifted upward by one entry in the unit 151B. (Step S233). Further, in the process of step S233, the game control counter setting unit 154 may update the total pending storage number count value stored in the total pending storage number counter by one. At this time, the fluctuation special figure designation buffer value which is the stored value of the fluctuation special figure designation buffer is updated to “2” (step S234).

  When the second special figure reserved memory number is “0” in step S231 (step S231; Yes), it is determined whether or not the first special figure reserved memory number is “0” (step S235). The first special figure reserved memory number is the reserved memory number of the special figure game using the first special figure by the first special symbol display device 4A. For example, in the process of step S235, the game control counter setting unit 154 reads the first reserved memory number count value stored in the first reserved memory number counter, and determines whether or not the read value is “0”. That's fine. Thus, the process of step S235 is executed when it is determined in step S231 that the second special figure reserved memory number is “0”, and the first special figure reserved memory number is “0”. It is determined whether or not. Thereby, execution of the special figure game using the second special figure is started in preference to the special figure game using the first special figure.

  It should be noted that the special game using the second special figure is not limited to a game executed with priority over the special graphic game using the first special figure. For example, the first start prize opening and the second start prize opening may be used. The execution of the special game may be started in the order in which the game balls enter (pass) and start winnings are generated. In this case, a table for storing data capable of specifying the order in which the start winnings are generated is provided, and the execution of the special game using either the first special figure or the second special figure is started from the stored data. It only has to be determined.

  When the first special figure reservation storage number is other than “0” in step S235 (step S235; No), the first special figure reservation storage unit 151A stores the storage corresponding to the reservation number “1”. As the data, numerical data indicating the random number value MR1 for determining the special figure display result, the random value MR2 for determining the jackpot type, the random value MR3 for determining the variation pattern type, and the random value MR4 for determining the variation pattern are read out (step) S236). The numerical data read at this time may be temporarily stored, for example, in a random number buffer for variation.

  Subsequent to the process of step S236, for example, by updating the first reserved memory number count value by subtracting 1 and updating the first special figure reserved memory number, the first special figure reserved memory is updated. The hold data indicating the random number values MR1 to MR4 stored in the entry lower than the hold number “1” (for example, the entry corresponding to the hold numbers “2” to “4”) is shifted upward by one entry in the unit 151A. (Step S237). Further, in the process of step S237, the game control counter setting unit 154 may update the total pending storage number count value stored in the total pending storage number counter by one. At this time, the variable special figure designation buffer value is updated to “1” (step S238).

  After executing either of the processes of steps S234 and S238, the special table display result, which is a variable symbol display result of the special symbol, is changed as a use table for deciding whether to make a “big hit” or “losing”. A special figure display result determination table corresponding to the special figure designation buffer value is selected and set (step S239). For example, when the variable special figure designation buffer value is “1”, the first special figure display result determination table 130A is set in the use table. On the other hand, when the variable special figure designation buffer value is “2”, the second special figure display result determination table 130B is set in the use table. Further, the CPU 103 may select the special figure display result determination table data corresponding to the current gaming state, similarly to the process of step S402 shown in FIG. Subsequently, the numerical data indicating the random number value MR1 for determining the special figure display result stored in the random number buffer for variation is assigned to the special figure display results of “big hit”, “small hit”, and “losing”. Compared with the value, it is determined whether the special figure display result is “big hit”, “small hit”, or “lost” (step S240).

  Since the special figure display result determination table data corresponding to the current gaming state is selected in step S239, in the process of step S240, the gaming state when the variable display of the special figure game or the like is started is a probable state. Whether or not the special figure display result is “big hit” is determined using different determination data. For example, when the game state when the variable display such as a special figure game is started is a normal state or a short time state, the game state is indicated in the first special figure display result determination table 130A or the second special figure display result determination table 130B. The table data corresponding to the normal state or the short time state is selected as the normal determination data, and the special figure display result corresponding to the random value MR1 is determined with reference to this table data. On the other hand, when the game state when the variable display of the special figure game or the like is started is a certain change state, the game state is determined in the first special figure display result determination table 130A or the second special figure display result determination table 130B. The table data corresponding to the probability variation state is selected as the special determination data, and the special figure display result corresponding to the random value MR1 is determined with reference to this data.

  After determining the special figure display result in step S240, it is determined whether or not the special figure display result is “big hit” (step S241). If it is determined that the game is a “hit” (step S241; Yes), the big hit flag provided in the game control flag setting unit 152 is set to the on state (step S242). At this time, the big hit type determination table 131 is selected and set as a use table for determining the big hit type as one of a plurality of types (step S243). By referring to the big hit type determination table 131 set in this way, numerical data indicating the big hit type determination random number MR2 stored in the random number buffer for fluctuation is changed to “non-probability change”, “probability change”, “surprise change”. Depending on which of the determined values assigned to each jackpot type is matched, it is decided which of the jackpot types is a plurality of types (step S244).

  By determining the jackpot type in the processing of step S244, the gaming state after the end of the jackpot gaming state is any one of the short-time state and the probable state that is more advantageous to the player than the short-time state. It is determined before the fixed special symbol as the variable display result is derived. Corresponding to the jackpot type determined in this way, for example, by setting a jackpot type buffer value that is a stored value of the jackpot type buffer provided in the game control buffer setting unit 155 (step S245), the determined jackpot type Remember. As an example, if the big hit type is “non-probable change”, the big hit type buffer value may be “0”, “probable change” may be “1”, and “surprise” may be “2”.

  When it is determined in step S241 that it is not “big hit” (step S241; No), it is determined whether or not the special figure display result is “small hit” (step S246). When it is determined that the game is “small hit” (step S246; Yes), the small hit flag provided in the game control flag setting unit 152 is set to the on state (step S247).

  If it is determined in step S246 that the game is not “small hit” (step S246; No), or after performing any of the processes in steps S245 and S247, whether to control the big hit gaming state or the small hit gaming state. A determined special symbol is set in accordance with the result of the prior determination as to whether or not, and further, the determination result of the jackpot type when the jackpot game state is set (step S248). As an example, when it is determined in step S246 that the special figure display result is not “small hit”, a lost symbol is obtained corresponding to the pre-determined result indicating that the special figure display result is “lost”. The special symbol indicating the symbol “−” is set as the confirmed special symbol. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S246 that the special figure display result is “small hit”, the small figure corresponding to the pre-determined result indicating that the special figure display result is “small hit”. The special symbol indicating the number “2” as the symbol is set as the confirmed special symbol. If it is determined in step S241 that the special figure display result is “big hit”, the big hit symbols “3”, “5”, “7” corresponding to the big hit type determination result in step S244 are displayed. Any of the special symbols indicating the numbers "" is set as the confirmed special symbol. That is, according to the determination result that the jackpot type is “non-probable change”, the special symbol indicating the number “3” that is the normal jackpot symbol among the normal open round jackpot symbols is set as the confirmed special symbol. Also, according to the determination result that the jackpot type is “probable change”, the special symbol indicating the number “7” that becomes the probability variable big hit symbol among the normal open round big hit symbols is set as the confirmed special symbol. A special symbol indicating the number “5”, which is a short-term open big hit symbol, is set as the confirmed special symbol according to the determination result that the big hit type is “accuracy”.

  After the confirmed special symbol is set in step S248, the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to “1” corresponding to the variation pattern setting process (step S249), and then the special symbol normal process is terminated. . In step S235, when the number of reserved memories of the special figure game using the first special figure is “0” (step S235; Yes), after performing a predetermined demonstration display setting (step S250), the special symbol is set. Normal processing ends. In this demonstration display setting, for example, an effect control command (customer waiting demo designation command) for designating a demonstration display (demonstration screen display) by displaying a predetermined effect image on the image display device 5 is effect control from the main board 11. It is determined whether or not transmission to the substrate 12 has been completed. At this time, if the transmission has been completed, the demonstration display setting is ended as it is. On the other hand, if it has not been transmitted, the setting for transmitting the customer waiting demonstration designation command is performed, and then the demonstration display setting is terminated.

  FIG. 20 is a flowchart illustrating an example of a process executed in step S111 in FIG. 16 as the variation pattern setting process. In the variation pattern setting process shown in FIG. 20, the CPU 103 first determines whether or not the big hit flag is on (step S261). If the big hit flag is ON (step S261; Yes), the variation pattern corresponding to the big hit when the special figure display result is “big hit” is determined (step S262).

  If the big hit flag is off in step S261, it is determined whether or not the small hit flag is on (step S263). If the small hit flag is ON (step S263; Yes), the variation pattern corresponding to the small hit when the special figure display result is “small hit” is determined (step S264). On the other hand, when the small hit flag is off (step S263; No), the variation pattern corresponding to the time of loss when the special figure display result is “lost” is determined (step S265).

  After executing any of the processes of steps S262, S264, and S265 shown in FIG. 20, a special figure change time that is a variable symbol display time is set (step S266). The special figure change time, which is the variable display time of the special symbol, is the time required from the start of the change of the special symbol in the special figure game until the fixed special symbol that becomes the variable display result (special display result) is derived and displayed. It is. As shown in FIG. 5, the special figure fluctuation time is determined in advance corresponding to a plurality of fluctuation patterns prepared in advance. The CPU 103 can set the timing at which a special symbol or decorative symbol variable display result is derived by setting the special symbol variation time.

  Following the process of step S266, a special game using the first special figure in the first special symbol display device 4A and a special game using the second special figure in the second special symbol display device 4B are started. The special symbol change is started so as to start any special figure game for which the condition is satisfied (step S267). As an example, if the variable special symbol designation buffer value is “1”, a drive signal for updating the display of the first special symbol in the first special symbol display device 4A is transmitted. On the other hand, if the variable special symbol designation buffer value is “2”, a drive signal for updating the display of the second special symbol in the second special symbol display device 4B is transmitted.

  After executing the process of step S267, command transmission setting is performed at the start of the special symbol fluctuation (step S268). For example, when the variation special figure designation buffer value is “1”, the CPU 103 sends a first variation start command, a variation pattern designation command, a variable display result notification command, a first variation from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12. In order to sequentially transmit the pending storage number notification command, the storage address (first address) in the ROM 101 of the first variation start command table prepared in advance is designated. On the other hand, when the variation special figure designation buffer value is “2”, the CPU 103 sends the second variation start command, the variation pattern designation command, the variable display result notification command, the second variation from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12. In order to sequentially transmit the pending storage number notification command, the storage address in the ROM 101 of the second variation start command table prepared in advance is designated.

  The first variation start command and the second variation start command use the variation start in the special symbol game using the first special symbol in the first special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol in the second special symbol display device 4B. This is an effect control command for designating the start of fluctuation in the special figure game. The variation pattern designation command is an effect control command for designating the content of the variation pattern selected in step S262, and “left” and “middle” in the image display device 5 corresponding to the variable display of special symbols in the special figure game. , An effect control command for designating a variation pattern such as a decorative symbol variably displayed in each of the “right” decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R. The variable display result notification command is based on the fixed special symbol determined in step S240, and the variable symbol display result (“big hit”, “losing”, “small hit”, and what kind of big hit type is This is an effect control command for designating whether there is any. The first reserved memory number notification command and the second reserved memory number notification command are effect control commands for notifying the first special figure reserved memory number and the second special figure reserved memory number.

  After executing the process of step S268, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to “2” (step S269), and the variation pattern setting process is terminated. When the value of the special figure process flag is updated to “2” in step S269, when the next timer interruption occurs, the special symbol variation process of step S112 shown in FIG. 16 is executed.

  Next, the operation in the effect control board 12 will be described.

  In the effect control board 12, when the supply of the power supply voltage is received from the power supply board or the like, the effect control CPU 120 is activated and executes the effect control main process as shown in the flowchart of FIG. When the effect control main process shown in FIG. 21 is started, the effect control CPU 120 first executes a predetermined initialization process (step S71), clears the RAM 122, sets various initial values, and displays the effect control board 12. Performs register settings for the mounted CTC (counter / timer circuit). Thereafter, it is determined whether or not the timer interrupt flag is on (step S72). The timer interrupt flag is set to the ON state every time a predetermined time (for example, 2 milliseconds) elapses based on, for example, the CTC register setting. At this time, if the timer interrupt flag is off (step S72; No), the process of step S72 is repeatedly executed and waits.

  On the side of the effect control board 12, an interrupt for receiving an effect control command from the main board 11 is generated separately from the timer interrupt that occurs every time a predetermined time elapses. This interruption is generated when, for example, an effect control INT signal from the main board 11 is turned on. When an interruption due to the turn-on of the effect control INT signal occurs, the effect control CPU 120 automatically sets the interrupt prohibition, but if a CPU that does not automatically enter the interrupt disable state is used, It is desirable to issue a prohibition instruction (DI instruction). The effect control CPU 120 executes, for example, a predetermined command reception interrupt process in response to an interrupt when the effect control INT signal is turned on. In this command reception interrupt process, a control signal that becomes an effect control command from a predetermined input port that receives a control signal transmitted from the main board 11 via the relay board 15 among the input ports included in the I / O 125. Capture. The effect control command captured at this time is stored, for example, in an effect control command reception buffer provided in the effect control buffer setting unit 194. As an example, when the production control command has a 2-byte configuration, the first byte (MODE) and the second byte (EXT) are sequentially received and stored in the production control command reception buffer. Thereafter, the effect control CPU 120 ends the command reception interrupt processing after setting the interrupt permission.

  If the timer interrupt flag is on in step S72 (step S72; Yes), the timer interrupt flag is cleared and turned off (step S73), and command analysis processing is executed (step S74). In the command analysis process executed in step S74, for example, after reading various effect control commands transmitted from the game control microcomputer 100 of the main board 11 and stored in the effect control command reception buffer, the reading is performed. Settings and control corresponding to the issued effect control command are performed.

  After executing the command analysis process in step S74, an effect control process is executed (step S75). In the effect control process of step S75, for example, an effect image display operation in the display area of the image display device 5, an audio output operation from the speakers 8L and 8R, a lighting operation in the decorative light emitter such as the game effect lamp 9 and the decoration LED, With respect to the control contents of the rendering operation using various rendering devices such as the driving operation in the rendering model, determination, determination, setting, and the like are performed according to the rendering control command transmitted from the main board 11 and the like.

  Following the effect control process of step S75, an effect random number update process is executed (step S76), and the effect random numbers counted by the random counter of the effect control counter setting unit 193 are used as various random values used for effect control. The numerical data indicating is updated by software. Thereafter, the process returns to step S72.

  FIG. 22 is an explanatory diagram illustrating random numbers counted on the side of the effect control board 12. As shown in FIG. 22, in this embodiment, on the side of the effect control board 12, numerical values indicating the random number value SR1 for determining the suggestion effect execution and the random value SR2 for determining the suggestion effect type extracted from the random number circuit 124. Data is controlled to be countable. Note that random numbers other than SR1 and SR2 may be used to enhance the effect. The random value SR1 for determining the suggestion effect execution is a random value used for determining whether or not the suggestion effect is executed in the mission effect, and takes a value in the range of “1” to “100”, for example. The random value SR2 for determining the suggestion effect type is a random value used for determining the suggestion effect type, and takes a value in the range of “1” to “100”, for example.

  FIG. 23 is a diagram showing a suggestion effect execution determination table (without a resurgence effect), a suggestion effect execution determination table (with a rebirth effect), and a suggestion effect type determination table stored in the ROM 121 of the effect control board 12. . These suggestion effect execution determination table (no revival effect), suggestion effect execution determination table (with revival effect), and suggestion effect type determination table, in the mission effect, battle 1 effect after the start of the change of the special symbol It is a table for deciding whether to perform the suggestion effect which suggests whether to win a battle before it is performed.

  In the suggestion effect execution determination table (no revival effect), the mission is set so that the number of determination values shown in FIG. 23 (a) is 1 to 100 of the random value range of the suggestion effect execution determination random value SR1. “PMA-1” which is the mission variation pattern of “losing” in the production, “PMB-1” which is the mission variation pattern of winning in the battle 1 production in the mission production, and the mission fluctuation pattern of winning in the battle 2 production in the mission production Corresponding to each “PMB-2” and “PMB-3” which is the mission variation pattern that wins in the battle 3 effect in the mission effect, in the case of “execute the suggestion effect” and “do not execute the suggestion effect” A judgment value is set.

  Specifically, as the determination values corresponding to “PMA-1”, 10 determination values are assigned to “execute the suggestion effect”, and 90 determination values are assigned to “not execute the suggestion effect”, and “PMB-1”. As the determination values corresponding to, 60 determination values are assigned to “execute the suggestion effect” and 40 determination values are assigned to “do not execute the suggestion effect”. As the determination values corresponding to “PMB-2”, 40 determination values are assigned to “execute”, and 60 determination values are assigned to “do not perform suggestion effect”. As the determination values corresponding to “PMB-3”, 20 apply to “execute suggestion effect”, 80 determination values are assigned to “do not execute”.

  In the suggestion effect execution determination table (without resurgence effect), out of the mission variation patterns “PMB-1 to PMB-3” that win the battle, the mission variation pattern “PMB-1” that wins the battle 1 effect is 60%. The decision value is assigned to execute the suggestion effect at a rate, and the decision value is assigned so that the mission variation pattern “PMB-2” winning by the battle 2 effect executes the suggestion effect at a rate of 40%. In addition, the determination value is assigned so that the mission variation pattern “PMB-3” winning in the battle 3 effect executes the suggestion effect at a rate of 20%. In other words, in this embodiment, the mission variation pattern that wins with a small number of battles is set to have a higher ratio of executing the suggestion effect. Note that the mission fluctuation pattern “PMA-1” of “losing” in the mission effect is assigned a determination value so as to execute the suggestion effect at a rate of 10%. In other words, in this embodiment, the suggestion effect may be executed even if the mission variation pattern “PMA-1” of “losing” is executed by defeating the battle 1 effect to the battle 3 effect.

  Further, in the suggestion effect execution determination table (with the resurgence effect), the number of determination values shown in FIG. 23B is selected from 1 to 100, which is the random value range of the suggestion effect execution determination random value SR1. , "PMC-1 to PMC-3", which is the mission variation pattern that wins the revival effect after executing the split effect after the battle 1 effect in the mission effect, revive after executing the split effect after the battle 2 effect in the mission effect “PMD-1” -PMD-2, which is a mission variation pattern that wins by production, and “PME-1”, a mission variation pattern, that wins by revival production 1 after executing the defeat production after the battle 3 production in the mission production Corresponding to each, a determination value is set in the case of “execution of suggestion effect” and in the case of “not execute suggestion effect”.

  Specifically, as determination values corresponding to “PMC-1 to PMC-3”, 70 determination values are assigned to “execute the suggestion effect” and 30 determination values are assigned to “not execute the suggestion effect”. As the determination values corresponding to “PMD-1 to PMD-2”, 50 determination values are assigned to “execute the suggestion effect”, and 50 determination values are assigned to “not execute the suggestion effect”, and correspond to “PME-1”. As the determination values to be performed, 30 determination values are assigned to “execute the suggestion effect” and 70 determination values are assigned to “do not execute the suggestion effect”.

  In the suggestion effect execution determination table (with resurgence effect), the mission variation pattern “PMC-1 to PMC-3” that wins the resurgence effect after executing the division effect after the battle 1 effect has a suggestion effect of 70%. The decision value is assigned to be executed, and after executing the divided effect after the battle 2 effect, the mission variation pattern “PMD-1 to PMD-2” that wins the resurrection effect executes the suggestion effect at a rate of 50%. It is determined that the mission variation pattern “PME-1” that wins the revival effect 1 after executing the defeat effect after the battle 3 effect executes the suggestion effect at a rate of 30%. A value has been assigned. That is, in this embodiment, the variation pattern that wins with a small number of battles is set such that the ratio of executing the suggestion effect is high.

  In the present embodiment, as described above, the mission variation pattern that wins with a small number of battles is set to have a higher ratio of executing the suggestive effect, but the present invention is not limited to this, You may make it set so that the ratio which performs a suggestion effect becomes high so that the mission fluctuation pattern which wins with many battle frequency | counts.

  Further, as shown in FIGS. 23 (a) and 23 (b), a determination value is assigned so that the mission variation pattern “PMB-1” winning in the battle 1 effect executes the suggested effect at a rate of 60%. On the other hand, the decision value is set so that the mission variation pattern “PMC-1 to PMC-3” that wins the revival effect after executing the divided effect after the battle 1 effect executes the suggested effect at a ratio of 70%. Are assigned, and the same battle 1 effect is performed, and even if the mission variation pattern “PMB-1” and the mission variation patterns “PMC-1 to PMC-3” become “big hit”, the resurrection effect is implemented. The proportion of the mission variation patterns “PMC-1 to PMC-3” to be performed is set higher.

  Furthermore, the mission variation pattern “PMB-2” that wins in the battle 2 effect is assigned a judgment value so that the suggestion effect is executed at a rate of 40%, while the divided effect after the battle 2 effect is executed. The mission variation pattern “PMD-1 to PMD-2” that wins in the resurgence after being assigned is assigned a judgment value so that the suggestion is executed at a rate of 50%. Even if the mission variation pattern “PMB-2” and the mission variation pattern “PMD-1 to PMD-2” become “”, the mission variation pattern “PMD-1 to PMD-2” that implements the revival effect is more The ratio at which the suggestion effect is executed is set high.

  Similarly, the mission fluctuation pattern “PMB-3” that wins in the battle 3 effect is assigned a determination value so that the suggestion effect is executed at a rate of 20%, whereas after the defeat effect after the battle 3 effect. The mission fluctuation pattern “PME-1” that wins in the resurrection stage 1 is assigned a judgment value so that the suggestion stage is executed at a rate of 30%. Even if the pattern “PMB-3” and the mission variation pattern “PME-1” are set, the mission variation pattern “PME-1” that performs the revival effect is set to have a higher rate of execution of the suggested effect. Yes.

  Therefore, if the number of battles performed in the mission effect is the same, the suggestion effect is more easily performed when the resurrection effect is performed than when the resurrection effect is not performed.

  In the suggestion effect type determination table, the “lost” in the mission effect is set such that the number of determination values shown in FIG. 23C is 1 to 100 of the random value range of the suggestion effect type determination random value SR2. “PMA-1” which is the mission variation pattern of “PMB”, “PMB-1” which is the mission variation pattern that wins in the battle 1 effect in the mission effect, and “PMB-2” that is the mission variation pattern that wins in the battle 2 effect in the mission effect “PMB-3”, which is a mission variation pattern that wins in the battle 3 effect in the mission effect, “PMC-1 to PMC-3” that is a mission variation pattern that wins in the resurrection effect after the battle 1 effect in the mission effect, Mission Fluctuation Pattern to Win in the Resurrection Direction after Battle 2 Direction in Mission Direction Corresponding to each of “PME-1” to “PMD-2” and “PME-1”, which is a mission variation pattern that wins in the resurrection effect after the battle 3 effect in the mission effect, the battle effect 1 to the battle 3 in the mission effect “White”, which is a suggestion effect type that suggests that the battle effect until the effect is executed, and the suggestion effect type that indicates that the battle effect from the battle 1 effect to the battle 2 effect is executed in the mission effect. A determination value is set for “red” and “sakura” which is a suggestion effect type that suggests that only the battle 1 effect is executed in the mission effect. Note that “white”, “red”, and “cherry blossom”, which are the suggested effect types, indicate the colors of the masks that the enemy character that faces the teammate character in the suggestion effect (see FIG. 36).

  Specifically, 100 determination values are assigned to “white” as determination values corresponding to “PMA-1”, and 10 determination values are allocated to “white” as “PMB-1”. , 20 judgment values are assigned to “red”, and 70 judgment values are assigned to “sakura”. As judgment values corresponding to “PMB-2”, 10 are given to “white”, 70 are given to “red”, “ Twenty judgment values are assigned to “sakura”. As judgment values corresponding to “PMB-3”, there are 70 judgment values for “white”, 20 for “red”, and 10 judgment values for “sakura”. As the determination values corresponding to “PMC-1 to PMC-3”, five determination values are assigned to “white”, five to “red”, and ninety to “sakura”. As judgment values corresponding to “PMD-1 to PMD-2”, 5 judgment values are assigned to “white”, 90 to “red”, and 5 to “sakura”. Terra is and, as a judgment value corresponding to "PME-1", 90 to "white", five to "red", the five decision value to "Sakura" is assigned.

  That is, in this embodiment, when the mission variation pattern is “PMA-1”, the suggestion effect type “white” is selected at a rate of 100%. In addition, in the mission variation patterns “PMB-1” and “PMC-1 to PMC-3” that have the highest ratio of selecting “sakura” from “white”, “red”, and “cherry” as the suggestion effect type, the resurrection effect is executed. In the mission variation patterns “PMC-1 to PMC-3”, the suggestion effect type “Sakura” is selected at a higher rate, and “white”, “red”, “ In the mission variation patterns “PMB-2” and “PMD-1 to PMD-2” that have the highest ratio of selecting “red” from “sakura”, the mission variation patterns “PMD-1 to PMD-2” in which the revival effect is executed are performed. "" Is selected at a higher rate, "red" of the suggested effect type, and the ratio of selecting "white" from "white" "red" "sakura" as the suggested effect type is the highest Mission fluctuation pattern “PMB 3 "and the" PME-1 ", towards the mission fluctuation pattern revival production is executed" PME-1 "is, so that the" white "of the suggested rendering genre at a higher rate is selected.

  In this way, in this embodiment, the mask that the enemy character is wearing is more likely to be a big hit with a small number of battles in the order of cherry pattern> red> white, and the rebirth effect is performed. It is set so that there is a high probability that it will be a probable big hit.

  FIG. 24 is a flowchart showing an example of processing executed in step S74 of FIG. 21 as command analysis processing. In the command analysis processing shown in FIG. 24, the effect control CPU 120 first receives the command received from the main board 11 transmitted via the relay board 15 by confirming the storage contents of the effect control command reception buffer. It is determined whether or not there is (step S501). At this time, if there is no received command (step S501; No), the command analysis processing is terminated.

  If there is a received command in step S501 (step S501; Yes), for example, by checking the MODE data of the received command, it is determined whether or not the received command is the first start opening prize designation command. (Step S502). If it is the first start opening winning designation command (step S502; Yes), the first reserved storage number notification waiting time is set (step S503). For example, in the process of step S503, a timer initial value determined in advance corresponding to the reception waiting time of the first pending storage number notification command is set in the command reception control timer provided in the effect control timer setting unit 192. That's fine.

  If the received command is not the first start opening winning designation command in step S502 (step S502; No), it is determined whether or not the received command is the second starting opening winning designation command (step S504). If it is the second start opening winning designation command (step S504; Yes), the second reserved storage number notification waiting time is set (step S505). For example, in the process of step S505, a timer initial value determined in advance corresponding to the reception waiting time of the second pending storage number notification command may be set in the command reception control timer.

  If it is determined in step S504 that the received command is not the second start opening winning designation command (step S504; No), it is determined whether or not the received command is a symbol designation command (step S506). If the received command is not a symbol designating command in step S506 (step S506; No), it is determined whether the received command is a variable category command (step S507). If the received command is not a variable category command in step S507 (step S507; No), it is determined whether or not the received command is a first pending storage number notification command (step S508). When the command is the first pending storage count notification command (step S508; Yes), the first pending storage count notification waiting time is cleared by, for example, initializing the timing operation by the command reception control timer (step S509). .

  If the received command is not the first reserved memory number notification command in step S508 (step S508; No), it is determined whether or not the received command is the second reserved memory number notification command (step S510). When the command is the second pending storage count notification command (step S510; Yes), the second pending storage count notification waiting time is cleared by, for example, initializing the timing operation by the command reception control timer (step S511). .

  If the received command is a symbol designating command in step S506 (step S506; Yes), the received command is a variable category command in step S507 (step S507; Yes), or steps S503, S505, S509, and S511. After executing any of the above processes, the received command is stored at the head of the empty area in the start winning received command buffer 194A (step S512), and the process returns to the step S501.

  In addition, when the pending storage number notification command (first pending storage number notification command or second pending storage number notification command) is received together with the variation start command (first variation start command or second variation start command), the pending storage is performed. The number notification command may not be stored in the start winning reception command buffer 194A. That is, it is only necessary that the effect control commands received in response to the occurrence of the start winning can be sequentially stored from the beginning of the empty area in the start winning receiving command buffer 194A.

  If the received command is not the second pending storage number notification command in step S510 (step S510; No), after making settings according to other received commands (step S513), the process returns to step S501.

  An effect control command received from the main board 11 when a start winning occurs, such as a start opening winning designation command, a symbol designation command, a variable category command, and a reserved memory number notification command, is also referred to as a command at the time of starting winning. In addition, the first reserved memory number notification command and the second reserved memory number notification command, which are production control commands for specifying that the first special figure reserved memory number and the second special figure reserved memory number have increased, can be recognized. Also called stored information. The on-hold storage information includes a start opening prize designation command. When a start winning is generated, based on numerical data indicating random numbers MR1 to MR4, etc., a determination result as to whether or not the variable display result is determined to be “big hit” or “small hit”, and a determination result of the big hit type The symbol designation command and the variation category command, which are production control commands for designating the variation category determination result, are also referred to as determination result information. Note that when receiving commands are sequentially stored from the beginning of the empty area in the start winning reception command buffer 194A, the received command is any one of a start opening winning designation command, a symbol designation command, a variable category command, and a reserved memory count notification command. May be stored without distinction, or each received command may be distinguished and stored at the head of the free area in the corresponding storage area. When receiving each received command separately, the storage area of the received received command is blank, and only some effect control commands to be received as one set are excessively stored.

  As a specific example, when one of a symbol designation command, a variable category command, and a reserved memory count notification command is received, whether the first reserved memory count notification waiting time or the second reserved memory count notification waiting time has elapsed. Determine whether. At this time, if these waiting times have not elapsed, it is determined that the command corresponding to the start port winning designation command can be received within the normal reception period, and the start port already stored in the start winning time reception command buffer 194A is stored. The received command is stored in association with the winning designation command. On the other hand, if any one of the symbol designation command, the variable category command, and the reserved memory number notification command is received, if the first reserved memory number notification waiting time and the second reserved memory number notification waiting time have elapsed, If the winning designation command is missing or cannot be received within the normal receiving period, the received command may be stored in association with the new buffer number in the starting winning reception command buffer 194A.

  FIG. 25 is a flowchart illustrating an example of processing executed in step S75 of FIG. 21 as the effect control process. In the effect control process shown in FIG. 25, the effect control CPU 120 first executes a prefetch notice determination process for determining the presence / absence of a prefetch notice effect and an effect mode (step S161).

  FIG. 26 is a flowchart showing an example of the prefetch notice determination process executed in step S161 of FIG. In the prefetch notice determination process shown in FIG. 26, the effect control CPU 120 first checks the stored contents in the start winning reception command buffer 194A (step S701). Then, it is determined whether or not there is a new received command that is at least one of the commands at the time of starting winning (step S702). For example, it is received by confirming whether at least one of the start opening winning designation command, the symbol designation command, the variable category command or the reserved memory count notification command is newly stored in the starting winning reception command buffer 194A. Can determine the presence or absence of commands. If no command is newly received (step S702; No), the prefetch notice determination process is terminated.

  If it is determined in step S702 that there is a reception command (step S702; Yes), it is determined whether or not a prefetch notice effect is already being executed (step S703). For example, in the process of step S703, it may be determined that the prefetching notice effect is being executed when the prefetching notice execution flag provided in the effect control flag setting unit 191 is on. The pre-reading notice execution flag is set to the on state when the prefetching notice effect is executed.

  In this embodiment, when the pre-reading notice effect is already being executed, the pre-reading notice effect is executed in the already determined effect mode so that the process for executing the pre-reading notice effect is not further performed. On the other hand, when the pre-reading notice effect is executed based on the winning determination result that the variable display mode is determined to be “non-reach”, the winning determination result that the variable display result is determined to be “big hit” When a winning determination result indicating that the pattern is determined to be a fluctuation pattern with or reach is obtained, the pre-reading notice effect being executed may be switched to a super reach or jackpot notice effect. Note that the pre-reading notice effect may be further executed regardless of the effect of the pre-reading notice effect that has already been executed.

  If the pre-reading notice effect is not being executed in step S703 (step S703; No), it is determined whether or not the pre-reading notice restriction that restricts the execution of the pre-reading notice effect is being executed (step S704). In step S704, if the pre-reading notice restriction is not in effect (step S704; No), the order and contents of the received commands based on the occurrence of the start winning prize are checked (step S706), and it is determined whether or not the reception is successful. (Step S707). In the process of step S707, for example, whether or not the received commands at the start winning prize are in order, whether or not all the received commands have been received without omission, whether the contents of the symbol designation command and the variable category command are consistent, Whether or not the contents of the oral winning designation command and the stored memory number notification command are consistent is confirmed, and if any one of them is denied, it may be determined that the reception was not successful. In addition, when any one is denied, it is not limited to what determines that abnormality has occurred, and for example, when any two are denied, it may be determined that abnormality has occurred. Alternatively, when all are denied, it may be determined that an abnormality has occurred.

  If it is determined in step S707 that the signal has been received normally (step S707; Yes), the previous variation category command stored in the start winning reception command buffer 194A is checked (step S708), and the current It is determined whether or not the number of stored storages is “3” or “4” and the variation category up to the previous time is only non-reach loss (step S709). That is, in this embodiment, when there are two or three hold data whose variable display result is “non-reach loss”, the continuous notice effect is executed using the hold data.

  Note that if the number of reserved memories is a sufficient number for executing the continuous notice effect (for example, 2 or more), the continuous notice effect may be executed. For example, like the continuous notice effect (prefetch notice effect) of the prefetch notice pattern SYP3-1 to be described later, except for the notice pattern in which the effect mode changes, it is continuous when the number of reserved memories that can notify that it is a series of effects. A notice effect may be executed. By doing so, it is possible to improve the overall execution frequency of the continuous notice effect.

  Further, when a pre-reading notice effect other than the stop symbol notice is executed, the continuous notice effect may be executed even when holding data whose variable display result is “non-reach lose” is included. In this case, since a reach may occur during the execution of the continuous notice effect or a “hit” may occur, an unexpected effect can be executed. When a continuous notice effect is to be executed when hold data with a variable display result of “non-reach lose” is included, for example, in variable display with reach, a continuous effect mode other than a stop symbol notice The notice effect may be selected. By doing so, it is possible to execute the continuous notice effect regardless of the display result before the variable display to be prefetched is executed.

  For example, in the process of step S708, the number of data received before the latest variation category command and stored in the start winning reception command buffer 194A, and the variation category specified by the variation category command Read. In the process of step S709, whether or not the number of data is “3” or “4”, or only specifies a variation category corresponding to non-reach loss (variation category command C600) based on the reading result in step S708. Determine whether.

  If it is determined in step S709 that the current number of pending storages is “3” or “4”, and the previous variation category is non-reach loss, Step S709; Yes), it is determined whether or not the prefetching notice effect is to be executed, and a prefetching notice pattern corresponding to the prefetching notice effect in the case of executing the prefetching notice effect (step S710).

  As an example, in the process of step S710, a prefetch notice determination table prepared in advance is selected and set as a use table for determining the presence or absence of the prefetch notice effect and the prefetch notice pattern. In the pre-reading notice determination table, a numerical value (compared with a random number value for determining the pre-reading notice type according to the specification contents of the variable category command transmitted based on the occurrence of the start winning corresponding to the variable display to be noticed) ( The determination value) may be assigned to a determination result of “no execution” corresponding to the case where the prefetching notice effect is not executed, a plurality of prefetching notice patterns when the prefetching notice effect is executed, or the like. Thereafter, the effect control CPU 120 refers to the prefetch notice determination table based on numerical data indicating random numbers for prefetch notice determination extracted from the random number circuit 124 or the random counter of the effect control counter setting unit 193, for example. The presence / absence of a prefetch notice effect and the prefetch notice pattern may be determined.

  In the process of step S710, for example, the presence / absence of the prefetching notice effect and the prefetching notice pattern may be decided at a decision rate as shown in FIG. In the setting example of the determination ratio shown in FIG. 27, the presence / absence of the prefetching notice effect and the determination ratio of the prefetching notice pattern are varied depending on the variation category.

  In this embodiment, four types of pre-reading notice patterns, SYP1-1, SYP1-2, SYP2-1, and SYP3-1, are provided. The pre-reading notice patterns SYP1-1 and SYP1-2 constitute a chance for a continuous effect predetermined in the image display device 5 over a plurality of variable displays until the variable display to be noticed is executed. This is a prefetching notice pattern corresponding to a stop symbol notice in which the decorative symbol stops. In the stop symbol notice based on the prefetch notice pattern SYP1-1, one of the chance eyes CA1 to CA8 (chance eye A) shown in FIG. As shown in FIG. 28A, in the chance eye A, the left symbol and the middle symbol are the same number, and only the right symbol is a combination of numbers shifted by one. Further, in the stop symbol announcement based on the prefetch notice pattern SYP1-2, any of chance chances CB1 to CB6 (chance eye B) shown in FIG. As shown in FIG. 28 (B), chance chance B is a combination of sequence numbers. In this embodiment, as will be described later, it is possible that a big hit will be given when the stop symbol notice that the chance eye B stops is executed, rather than when the stop symbol notice that the chance eye A stops is executed. The reliability (big hit reliability) is high. By doing in this way, when the stop symbol notice is executed, it is possible to make the player pay attention to which chance is stopped, and the interest of the game is improved.

  The chance eyes A and the chance eyes B are not limited to those shown in FIGS. 28A and 28B, and may be a predetermined combination that can be distinguished from each other. For example, the chance eye A may be an arbitrary combination of even numbers that are normal symbols (non-probable variation symbols), and the chance eye B may be an arbitrary combination of odd numbers that are probability variation symbols. By doing so, it becomes easier for the player to recognize which opportunity he is.

  The pre-reading notice pattern SYP2-1 changes the background image in the image display device 5 from a normal background image to a special background image during the variable display prior to the execution of the variable display subject to the notice. This is a look-ahead notice pattern corresponding to executing a background change notice serving as a special background image until a target variable display is executed.

  The prefetching notice pattern SYP3-1 is a prefetching notice pattern corresponding to executing a prefetch notice effect that changes to a background change notice after the stop symbol notice that the chance eye A stops is executed.

  As shown in FIG. 27, in this embodiment, the rate at which the pre-reading notice effect is executed depending on whether the variation category is “non-reach lose”, “reach lose”, “accuracy / small hit”, or “big hit”, The determination rate of the prefetch notice pattern is different.

  Specifically, when the fluctuation category is “reach loss”, the pre-reading notice effect is executed (the rate determined other than “execution”) is higher than when it is “non-reach loss”. In the case where the variation category is “big hit”, the pre-reading notice effect is executed more frequently than in the case of “non-reach lose”, “reach lose”, and “accuracy / small hit”. With such a setting, by executing the pre-reading notice effect, it is possible to give a notice / indication that the variable display result is “big hit” or that the reach is executed. If the variation category is “Accuracy / Small Hit”, “Accuracy” or substantial In order to prevent the player from being discouraged by becoming a “small hit” in which the game state does not change in addition to not being able to get a ball (prize ball), the pre-reading notice effect may not be executed. Good.

  In addition, in the determination ratio shown in FIG. 27, the prefetching notice effect of the prefetching notice pattern SYP1-2 in which the chance eye B is stopped is greater than the case where the prefetching notice effect of the prefetching notice pattern SYP1-1 in which the chance eye A is stopped is executed. When the is executed, the rate at which the variable display result is “big hit” (big hit reliability) and the rate at which reach is executed (reach reliability) are higher. Thus, since the big hit reliability and the reach reliability are different depending on the type of chance, the player comes to pay attention to the stop symbol, and the interest of the game is improved.

  Further, when the prefetching notice effect of the prefetching notice pattern SYP2-1 of the background change notice is executed, compared to the case where the prefetching notice effect of the stop symbol notice such as the prefetching notice pattern SYP1-1 or the prefetching notice pattern SYP1-2 is executed. The higher the jackpot reliability and reach reliability.

  Further, the prefetching notice of the prefetching notice pattern SYP3-1 that changes from the stop symbol notice to the background change notice rather than the case where the prefetching notice effect of the stop symbol notice such as the prefetching notice pattern SYP1-1 or the prefetching notice pattern SYP1-2 is executed. The jackpot reliability and reach reliability are higher when the performance is executed.

  In this way, even if the pre-reading notice effect of the stop symbol notice with low jackpot reliability or reach reliability is executed, it may change to a background change notice with high hit reliability or reach reliability, Even when the stop symbol notice is executed, the player expects to change to the background change notice, so that the player's expectation can be maintained and the interest of the game is improved.

  In particular, the prefetching notice effect of the prefetching notice pattern SYP3-1 is changed from the same effect form (effect form in which the chance eye A is stopped) to the background change notice from the prefetch notice pattern SYP1-1 having the lowest jackpot reliability and reach reliability. It is going to change. As a result, even when a pre-reading notice effect with the lowest hit reliability or reach reliability and when the chance eye A stops is executed, the player's expectation can be maintained and the interest of the game is improved.

  In this embodiment, there is a case in which the chance symbol A stops from the stop symbol advance notice to the background change notice, while the stop symbol advance notice that the chance eye B stops does not change to the background change notice (changes). The ratio is 0%). However, the present invention is not limited to this, and there may be a case where the chance symbol B changes from a stop symbol advance notice to a background change advance notice. In this case, if the rate of change to the background change notice is different between the case where the stop symbol notice that the chance eye A stops is executed and the case that the stop symbol notice that the chance eye B stops is executed. Good. Specifically, it is possible to make the change from the stop symbol notice that the chance eye A with a low jackpot reliability or reach reliability when the background change notice does not change stop more easily to the background change notice. preferable. By doing so, even when a stop symbol notice having a low jackpot reliability or reach reliability is executed, it is possible to maintain the player's expectation and improve the interest of the game.

  Further, the big hit reliability and the reach reliability are higher when the prefetching notice effect of the prefetching notice pattern SYP3-1 is executed than when the prefetching notice effect of the prefetching notice pattern SYP2-1 is executed. Yes. By such setting, the player is more expected to change to the background change notice, the player's sense of expectation can be further maintained, and the interest of the game is improved.

  Note that when the game state is a big hit game state or a small hit game state, it may be limited not to execute the prefetch notice effect. Whether or not the game state is a big hit gaming state can be determined, for example, in accordance with whether or not the value of the effect process flag is “6” or “7”. Further, whether or not the game state is a small hit game state can be determined, for example, corresponding to whether or not the value of the effect process flag is “4” or “5”.

  On the other hand, even when the gaming state is the big hit gaming state or the small hit gaming state, the pre-reading notice effect may be made executable. For example, after receiving a start winning command based on the occurrence of a start winning, when the number of executions of a round in the big hit gaming state reaches a predetermined number (for example, “10”), the command is stored in the start winning received command buffer 194A. It may be determined whether or not the pre-reading notice effect is executed by reading the symbol designating command and the variation category command, and the pre-reading notice effect is executed during the round. In this case, as a pre-reading notice effect, for example, an effect of a one-notification notification mode that definitely notifies that the variable display result becomes “big hit” after the end of the current big hit gaming state is executed. May be.

  Based on the determination by the process of step S710 illustrated in FIG. 26, it is determined whether or not “no execution” is performed in which the prefetch notice effect is not executed (step S711). At this time, if it is other than “no execution” (step S711; No), a setting for starting execution of the prefetching notice effect according to the determined prefetching notice pattern is performed (step S712). In step S712, the pre-reading notice storage count is set as a count initial value in the pre-reading notice execution number counter indicating the number of variable displays for executing the pre-reading notice effect. The setting corresponding to the notice production being performed is performed. In addition, the prefetching advance notice pattern determined in step S710 and the prefetching notice effect control pattern corresponding to the current number of special figure hold storage are set.

  FIG. 29 is a diagram showing a list of prefetch notice effect control patterns. As shown in FIG. 29, there are a prefetch notice preview control pattern SCP1-1 corresponding to the prefetch notice pattern SYP1-1 and the special figure reservation storage number 3 and a prefetch notice pattern SYP1-1. A pre-reading notice effect control pattern SCP1-2 corresponding to the reserved memory number being 4 and a prefetching notice effect control pattern SCP2- corresponding to the prefetching notice pattern SYP1-2 and the special figure reserved memory number being 3. 1, a prefetching notice effect control pattern SCP2-2 that corresponds to the prefetching notice pattern SYP1-2 and the special figure hold memory number is 4, and a prefetch notice pattern SYP2-1 that has a special figure hold memory number. 3 is a pre-reading notice effect control pattern SCP3-1 corresponding to 3 and a pre-reading notice pattern SYP2-1, and the special figure hold storage number is 4. A pre-reading notice effect control pattern SCP 3-2 corresponding to a certain thing, a pre-reading notice effect control pattern SCP 4-1 corresponding to a pre-reading notice pattern SYP 3-1 having a special figure holding memory number of 3, and a pre-reading notice pattern A pre-reading notice effect control pattern SCP4-2 corresponding to the SYP3-1 and the special figure reservation storage number being 4 is provided. As shown in FIG. 29, each prefetching notice effect control pattern is composed of control data corresponding to the contents of the effect executed in each change after the prefetching notice effect is started.

  As shown in FIG. 29, in the case of the prefetch notice pattern SYP3-1, the background change notice is executed at the second change after the prefetch notice effect is started. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the background change notice may be executed at the time of the change that is the target of the prefetching notice effect or at the time of the change one time before the change that is the target of the prefetching notice effect. For example, when the pre-reading notice pattern SYP3-1 is determined, the timing for executing the background change notice may be further determined, and the pre-reading notice effect control pattern corresponding to the determination result may be selected. . In this case, the determination ratio of the timing for executing the background change notice may be varied depending on the display result (variation category) of the change that is the target of the prefetch notice effect. By doing in this way, after the pre-reading notice effect of the stop symbol notice is executed, the big hit reliability and the reach reliability can be varied depending on the timing at which the background change notice is executed.

  After executing the process of step S712, when it is determined in step S703 that the pre-reading notice effect is being executed (step S703; Yes), when it is determined in step S704 that the pre-reading notice is being restricted ( (Step S704; Yes), when it is determined in Step S709 that the current reserved memory number is not “3” or “4”, or when it is determined that the previous variation category is not only non-reach loss (Step S709; No) Or, when it is determined as “No execution” in Step S711 (Step S711; Yes), the latest start opening winning designation command stored in the start winning reception command buffer 194A is the first It is determined whether it is a 1 start opening winning designation command (step S713).

  When it is the first start opening prize designation command in step S713 (step S713; Yes), the special figure game using the first special figure is newly held as the hold display in the start winning memory display area 5H. Control to update the corresponding display part is performed (step S714). In step S714, control is performed to update the hold display in the start winning storage display area 5H in a normal display mode (for example, a round white display). Thereafter, the prefetch notice determination process is terminated.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in step S713 that the command is not the first start opening winning designation command (step S713; No), the special game using the second special figure as the hold display in the start winning storage display area 5H. Control is performed to update the display part corresponding to the newly put on hold (step S715). In step S715, control is performed to update the hold display in the start winning storage display area 5H in a normal display mode (for example, a round white display). Thereafter, the prefetch notice determination process is terminated.

  When it is determined in step S707 that the command at the start winning prize has not been received normally (step S707; No), the undetermined information is set corresponding to the latest command in the start command receiving command buffer 194A ( Step S731). For example, a storage area for undecided information may be provided for each buffer number in the start winning reception command buffer 194A, and the undecided information for the buffer number corresponding to the latest command may be set to “1” (or ON state). .

  After the process of step S731, the display parts indicating the first special figure reserved memory number and the second special figure reserved memory number are respectively displayed as the common display at the time of the reserved display in the start winning memory display area 5H. The mode is changed to a mode (for example, round gray display), and the display portion corresponding to the newly reserved state is also displayed in the common non-normal display mode (step S732). Even if the start opening prize designation command (first start opening prize designation command or second start opening prize designation command) cannot be received normally, the reserved memory number notification command (first reserved memory number notification command or second If it is possible to identify the first special figure reserved memory number and the second special figure reserved memory number, the hold display is updated in the normal display mode. Also good. The display mode at the time of abnormal is different from the normal display mode or special display mode by changing part or all of the display color, display shape, display character, etc. of the display part, It is only necessary to be able to recognize in a recognizable manner that a failure has occurred. While only the display part corresponding to the newly reserved state is set as the display form at the time of non-normality, the display form in other display parts may not be changed.

  After performing the process of step S732, for example, after setting the pre-reading notice restriction, such as setting the pre-reading notice restriction flag provided in the effect control flag setting unit 191 or the like to the on state (step S733), the prefetching is performed. The notice determination process ends.

  In such a pre-reading notice determination process, when it is determined in step S707 that the command at the start winning prize has not been received normally, the process of step S710 is not executed, so that the pre-reading notice effect is not executed. Thus, for example, when the reserved memory number notification command as the reserved memory information for specifying that the increase in the first special figure reserved memory number or the second special figure reserved memory number has been recognized cannot be normally received. The execution of the pre-reading notice effect can be restricted.

  In addition, when only the start opening prize designation command is missing, when only the reserved memory number notification command is missing, or when the starting entry prize designation command and the reserved memory number notification command are not consistent, You may restrict | limit so that a prefetch notice effect may not be performed. That is, it is only necessary to be able to limit the execution of the pre-reading notice effect when the reserved memory information that specifies whether the first special figure reserved memory number or the second special figure reserved memory number has increased can be recognized. Thereby, it is possible to prevent the prefetching notice effect from being executed based on information with low credibility, and to prevent the player from feeling distrust.

  For example, a part or all of the reserved memory information for specifying which of the first special figure reserved memory number and the second special figure reserved memory number has increased, such as the start opening prize designation command and the reserved memory number notification command, can be recognized. When it is missed, the pre-reading notice effect may not be executed until the execution of variable display corresponding to the reserved storage is completed. As a result, it is possible to prevent the pre-reading notice effect and the variable display result from being inconsistent and to prevent the player from feeling distrust.

  For example, when a part or all of the determination result information such as a symbol designation command or a variable category command that designates the determination result at the time of starting winning is recognized so as to be recognized, execution of variable display corresponding to the reserved storage is ended. Up to this point, the pre-reading notice effect may not be executed. As a result, it is possible to prevent the pre-reading notice effect and the variable display result from being inconsistent, so that the player does not feel distrust.

  For example, when a part of judgment result information such as a symbol designation command or a variation category command is missed, even if the judgment result can be recognized by other judgment result information, the pre-reading notice effect based on the judgment result is not executed. You may restrict | limit. Thereby, it is possible to prevent the prefetching notice effect from being executed based on information with low credibility, and to prevent the player from feeling distrust.

  For example, when judgment results that can be recognized from multiple pieces of judgment result information such as symbol designation commands and variable category commands are not consistent, it is limited not to execute a pre-reading notice effect based on a judgment result that can be recognized by any judgment result information. May be. Thereby, it is possible to prevent the prefetching notice effect from being executed based on information with low credibility, and to prevent the player from feeling distrust.

  When the special figure game using the second special figure is executed in preference to the special figure game using the first special figure, when the high base state in which the high opening control associated with the time reduction control is performed, You may restrict | limit so that the pre-reading notice effect based on generation | occurrence | production of the start prize (1st start prize) by the game ball having passed (entry) 1 start prize opening may not be performed. When the high opening control is being performed, it is possible to continue to execute the special game using the second special figure that is preferentially executed by passing (entering) the game ball to the second start winning opening. . Therefore, the execution of the prefetching notice effect is started based on the hold data of the special figure game using the first special figure before the end of the jackpot gaming state, and the prefetching notice effect is continuously executed even after the end of the jackpot gaming state. Then, the variable display can be continuously executed many times in a state where the hold data or the like whose variable display result is “big hit” is held, and can be changed by executing the special figure game using the second special figure. The display result is “big hit”, and the gambling of the pachinko gaming machine 1 may be remarkably improved because the game is repeatedly controlled to the big hit gaming state. Further, while recognizing that the variable display result is “big hit” in the special game using the first special figure, the player repeatedly passes (enters) the game ball to the second start winning opening and makes the second special game. Depending on whether the special figure game using the figure is repeatedly executed or the special figure game using the first special figure is executed without passing (entering) the game ball to the second start winning opening, the variable display result is “ There is a possibility that the timing at which the game is set to “big hit” and controlled to the big hit gaming state may be greatly changed depending on the skill of the player. Therefore, by limiting the execution of the pre-reading notice effect based on the occurrence of the first start prize when in the high base state, the variable display result becomes “big hit” corresponding to the special figure game using the first special figure. It is possible to ensure sound gameability by preventing the player from recognizing the possibility.

  In addition to this, for example, when part or all of the reserved memory information such as the start opening prize designation command or the reserved memory count notification command is missed in the high base state, the determination such as the symbol designation command or the variable category command is performed. Even if the result information is normally received, it may be limited not to execute the prefetch notice effect. This prevents the player from recognizing that the variable display result may be a “big hit” corresponding to the special figure game using the first special figure. Can be secured.

  On the other hand, at least a part of the prefetch notice effect (for example, the prefetch notice effect with the lowest reliability, etc.) is executed when a part of the hold information such as the start opening prize designation command or the hold memory number notification command is missed. You may allow that. As a result, it is possible to execute the pre-reading notice effect using the command that can be normally received as much as possible, and to prevent the execution frequency of the pre-reading notice effect from being excessively reduced.

  In addition, for example, when a part of determination result information such as a symbol designation command or a variation category command is missed, it is permitted to execute at least a part of the prefetching notice effect (for example, the prefetching notice effect having the lowest reliability). May be. As a result, it is possible to execute the pre-reading notice effect using the command that can be normally received as much as possible, and to prevent the execution frequency of the pre-reading notice effect from being excessively reduced.

  Or, for example, when judgment results that can be recognized from a plurality of judgment result information such as a symbol designation command and a variation category command do not match, at least a part of the prefetching notice effect (for example, the prefetching notice effect having the lowest reliability) is executed. You may be allowed to do. As a result, it is possible to execute the pre-reading notice effect using the command that can be normally received as much as possible, and to prevent the execution frequency of the pre-reading notice effect from being excessively reduced.

  After the prefetch notice determination process is executed in step S161 shown in FIG. 25, a prefetch notice restriction release setting process is executed (step S162). In the prefetching notice restriction release setting process, when prefetching notice restriction is restricted so that the prefetching notice effect is not executed, a process for releasing the restriction based on the establishment of a predetermined condition and a prefetching notice effect being executed are performed. In response to the completion, a process for enabling execution of a new prefetch notice effect is executed. For example, when the pre-reading notice execution flag is in the ON state, the value of the remaining notice count counter is decremented by 1 each time the change starts, and the value of the remaining notice count counter becomes 0. The pre-reading notice execution flag is reset to the off state. When the pre-reading notice restriction flag is in the on state, the start winning prize command stored effectively corresponding to each of the buffer numbers “1” to “8” in the start winning prize receiving command buffer 194A. On the condition that all the orders and contents can be received correctly, the restriction that prevents the prefetching notice effect from being executed, for example, is cleared by clearing the prefetching notice restriction flag, for example. It should be noted that the restriction that prevents the pre-reading notice effect from being executed may be canceled on the condition that the pending storage in which the command is missed or the determination result is inconsistent is exhausted.

  After executing the pre-reading notice restriction release setting process in step S162 shown in FIG. 25, for example, depending on the value of the effect process flag provided in the effect control flag setting unit 191, the following steps S170 to S177 are performed. Select one of the processes to execute.

  The variable display start waiting process in step S170 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is “0”. This variable display start waiting process determines whether or not to start variable display of decorative symbols on the image display device 5 based on whether or not the first variation start command or the second variation start command is received from the main board 11. The process etc. which determine are included.

  The variable display start setting process in step S171 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is “1”. This variable display start setting process corresponds to the start of variable display of special symbols in the special symbol game by the first special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol display device 4B, and the decorative symbols in the image display device 5 In order to perform various display operations and other various presentation operations, it includes a process of determining a definite decorative pattern and various presentation control patterns according to the variation pattern of the special symbol, the type of display result, and the like.

  The variable display effect process in step S172 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is “2”. In this variable display effect processing, the effect control CPU 120 reads various control data from the effect control pattern corresponding to the timer value in the effect control process timer provided in the effect control timer setting unit 192, and displays the decorative pattern. Various effects are controlled during variable display. After performing such effect control, for example, an end code indicating the end of variable display of decorative symbols has been read from the special symbol variation effect control pattern, or a symbol confirmation command transmitted from the main board 11 has been received. Corresponding to the above, the final decorative symbol as the final stop symbol that is the variable display result of the decorative symbol is displayed in a completely stopped manner. If the final decorative design is displayed in a complete stop in response to the end code being read from the special pattern variation production control pattern, the variable display time corresponding to the variation pattern specified by the variation pattern designation command is displayed. Even if it does not depend on the effect control command from the main board 11, it is possible to determine and display the variable display result by autonomously deriving and displaying the determined decorative pattern on the effect control board 12 side. When the finalized decorative symbol is displayed as a complete stop, the value of the effect process flag is updated to “3”.

  The special figure waiting process in step S173 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is “3”. In this special figure waiting process, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not a hit start designation command transmitted from the main board 11 has been received. When the hit start designation command is received and the hit start designation command designates the start of the big hit gaming state, the value of the production process flag is “6” corresponding to the big hit middle production process. Update to On the other hand, when the hit start designation command is received and the hit start designation command designates the start of the small hit gaming state, the value of the production process flag is a value corresponding to the small hit medium production process. To “4”. When the production control process timer times out without receiving a hit start designation command, it is determined that the special figure display result in the special figure game is “lost”, and the value of the production process flag is the initial value. Update to “0”.

  The small hitting effect process in step S174 is a process executed when the value of the effect control process flag is “4”. In this small hit effect processing, the effect control CPU 120 sets, for example, an effect control pattern corresponding to the effect content in the small hit gaming state, and displays an effect image based on the set content on the display screen of the image display device 5. The sound and sound effects are output from the speakers 8L and 8R by outputting a command (sound effect signal) to the sound control board 13, and the game effect lamp 9 is output by outputting a command (lighting signal) to the lamp control board 14. Various effect control in the small hit gaming state such as lighting / extinguishing / flashing the decoration LED is executed. In the small hit effect processing, for example, the value of the effect process flag is updated to “5”, which is a value corresponding to the small hit end effect, in response to receiving a hit end designation command from the main board 11, for example. .

  The small hit end effect process in step S175 is a process executed when the value of the effect control process flag is “5”. In this small hit end effect process, the effect control CPU 120 sets, for example, an effect control pattern corresponding to the end of the small hit gaming state, etc., and displays an effect image based on the set content on the display screen of the image display device 5. The sound and sound effects are output from the speakers 8L and 8R by outputting a command (sound effect signal) to the sound control board 13, and the game effect lamp 9 is output by outputting a command (lighting signal) to the lamp control board 14. And various effect controls at the end of the small hit gaming state, such as turning on / off / flashing the decorative LED. Thereafter, the value of the effect process flag is updated to “0” which is an initial value.

  The big hit effect process in step S176 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is “6”. In this jackpot effect processing, the effect control CPU 120 sets, for example, an effect control pattern corresponding to the effect content in the jackpot gaming state, and displays an effect image based on the set content on the display screen of the image display device 5. In addition, a sound or sound effect is output from the speakers 8L and 8R by outputting a command (sound effect signal) to the sound control board 13, and a game effect lamp 9 or a decoration is output by outputting a command (electric signal) to the lamp control board 14. Various effect control in the big hit gaming state such as lighting / extinguishing / flashing the LED for the game is executed. In the big hit effect processing, for example, in response to receiving a hit end designation command from the main board 11, the value of the effect control process flag is updated to “7” which is a value corresponding to the ending effect processing.

  The ending effect process in step S177 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is “7”. In this ending effect process, the effect control CPU 120 sets an effect control pattern or the like corresponding to, for example, the end of the big hit gaming state, and displays an effect image based on the set content on the display screen of the image display device 5. The sound and sound effects are output from the speakers 8L and 8R by outputting a command (sound effect signal) to the sound control board 13, and the game effect lamp 9 and decoration are output by outputting the command (electric signal) to the lamp control board 14 Various effect controls such as turning on / off / flashing the LED are executed at the end of the big hit gaming state. Thereafter, the value of the effect process flag is updated to “0” which is an initial value.

  FIG. 30 is a flowchart illustrating an example of a process executed in step S171 of FIG. 25 as the variable display start setting process. In the variable display start setting process shown in FIG. 30, the effect control CPU 120 first reads the EXT data in the variable display result notification command transmitted from the main board 11, for example, and the special figure display result is “lost”. It is determined whether or not (step S522). When it is determined that the special figure display result is “lost” (step S522; Yes), for example, by reading the EXT data in the fluctuation pattern designation command transmitted from the main board 11, the designated fluctuation pattern is used. Is determined to be a non-reach variation pattern corresponding to the case where the decorative symbol variable display mode is “non-reach” (step S523).

  If it is determined in step S523 that the pattern is a non-reach variation pattern (step S523; Yes), a combination of fixed decorative symbols that is the final stop symbol constituting the non-reach combination is determined (step S524). As an example, in the process of step S524, first, numerical data indicating a random value for determining the left determined symbol updated by a random counter or the like provided in the effect control counter setting unit 193 is extracted and stored in advance in the ROM 121 or the like. By referring to a predetermined left determined symbol determination table, the left determined decorative symbol to be stopped and displayed in the “left” decorative symbol display area 5L in the display area of the image display device 5 is determined among the determined decorative symbols. Next, a predetermined right determined symbol determination table preliminarily stored in the ROM 121 or the like is extracted by extracting numerical data indicating random values for determining the right determined symbol updated by a random counter or the like provided in the effect control counter setting unit 193. , Etc., the right determined decorative symbol to be stopped and displayed in the “right” decorative symbol display area 5R in the display area of the image display device 5 is determined. At this time, the symbol number of the right determined decorative symbol may be determined so as to be different from the symbol number of the left determined decorative symbol by setting in the right determined symbol determining table or the like. Subsequently, numerical data indicating a random number for determining a medium fixed symbol updated by a random counter or the like provided in the effect control counter setting unit 193 is extracted, and a predetermined medium fixed symbol determination table stored in advance in the ROM 121 or the like. , Etc., the middle fixed decorative symbol that is stopped and displayed in the “medium” decorative symbol display area 5C in the display area of the image display device 5 is determined among the fixed decorative symbols. In the process of step S524, a fixed decorative symbol of a non-reach combination that becomes a predetermined chance symbol symbol may be determined in response to the case where the changing symbol notice is being executed.

  If it is determined in step S523 that the pattern is not a non-reach variation pattern (step S523; No), a combination of a confirmed decorative symbol that is a final stop symbol constituting the reach combination is determined (step S525). As an example, in the process of step S525, first, numerical data indicating a random value for determining the left and right determined symbols updated by a random counter or the like provided in the production control counter setting unit 193 is extracted and stored in advance in the ROM 121 or the like. In addition, by referring to a predetermined left / right determined symbol determination table or the like, the “left” and “right” decorative symbol display areas 5L and 5R in the display area of the image display device 5 among the determined decorative symbols are stopped and displayed together. The decorative symbol with the same symbol number is determined. Further, numerical data indicating a random number for determining a medium fixed symbol updated by a random counter or the like provided in the effect control counter setting unit 193 is extracted, and a predetermined medium fixed symbol determination table stored in advance in the ROM 121 or the like is extracted. By referring to this, among the determined decorative symbols, the medium fixed decorative symbol that is stopped and displayed in the “medium” decorative symbol display area 5C in the display area of the image display device 5 is determined. Here, for example, when the confirmed decorative symbol is a jackpot combination, such as when the symbol number of the middle confirmed decorative symbol is the same as the symbol number of the left confirmed decorative symbol and the right confirmed decorative symbol, an arbitrary value (For example, “1”) may be added to or subtracted from the symbol number of the medium-decorated decorative symbol so that the finalized decorative symbol is not the jackpot combination but the reach combination. Alternatively, when determining the medium-decorated decorative symbol, the difference (design difference) between the symbol number of the left confirmed decorative symbol and the right confirmed decorative symbol may be determined, and the medium-decorated decorative symbol corresponding to the symbol difference may be set. .

  When it is determined in step S522 that the special figure display result is not “lost” (step S522; No), the special figure display result is “big hit” and the big hit type is “surprise”, or the special figure display It is determined whether the result is “small hit” or other cases (step S526). When it is determined that it is “Accuracy” or “Small hit” (step S526; Yes), for example, a definite decoration that becomes a final stop symbol corresponding to the case of “Accuracy” or “Small hit” such as an opening chance. A combination of symbols is determined (step S527). As an example, in response to the case where any one of the variation patterns PC1-1 to PC1-3 is designated by the variation pattern designation command, the final stop symbol constituting one of a plurality of types of opening chances is determined. Determine the combination of decorative designs. In this case, a predetermined chance index determination table preliminarily stored in the ROM 121 or the like is extracted by extracting numerical data indicating random numbers for chance index determination updated by a random counter or the like provided in the effect control counter setting unit 193. It is only necessary to determine the combination of the confirmed decorative symbols constituting any of the opening chance eyes by referring to the above. When either the variation pattern PC1-4 or the variation pattern PC1-5 is designated by the variation pattern designation command, for example, by executing the same processing as in step S525, the final stop symbol constituting the reach combination is executed. What is necessary is just to determine the combination of the definite design which becomes.

  When it is determined in step S526 that it is “non-probability change” or “probability change” other than “probability” or “small hit” (step S526; No), the final decorative symbol that becomes the final stop symbol constituting the big hit combination is displayed. A combination is determined (step S528). As an example, in the process of step S528, first, numerical data indicating a random value for determining the jackpot fixed symbol updated by the random counter of the production control counter setting unit 193 is extracted, and subsequently stored in advance in the ROM 121 or the like. By referring to a predetermined jackpot determined symbol determination table, etc., the display is stopped and aligned in the “left”, “middle”, and “right” decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R on the screen of the image display device 5. A decorative design having the same design number is determined. At this time, depending on whether the jackpot type is “non-probable change” or “probability change”, and whether or not there is a promotion effect during the big hit, it may be determined that a different decorative symbol is determined as a final decorative symbol. Good.

  As a specific example, when the jackpot type is “non-probable variation”, any one of the multiple types of normal symbols is selected and determined as a definite decorative symbol constituting the non-probable variation jackpot combination. That's fine. When the jackpot type is “probable variation”, any one of a plurality of types of normal symbols or probability variation symbols is selected, and a definite ornament symbol that constitutes a non-probability variation jackpot combination or a probability variation jackpot combination. You just have to decide. At this time, when it is determined to be a definite decorative symbol of a non-probable variation big hit combination, the notification that it is controlled to the probable variation state is not performed in the re-drawing effect during variable display, and is executed corresponding to the big hit gaming state. What is necessary is just to alert | report that it is controlled to a probable change state by the promotion effect during a big hit. On the other hand, when it is determined to be a definite decorative combination of probability variation big hit combination, a notification that control is made to the probability variation state is performed in the re-lottery effect during variable display or without executing the re-lottery effect.

  After executing any of the processes of steps S524, S525, S527, and S528, a prefetch notice execution setting process is executed (step S535). FIG. 32 is a flowchart illustrating an example of the prefetch notice execution setting process. In the prefetching advance notice execution setting process shown in FIG. 32, the effect control CPU 120 first determines whether or not the prefetching notice execution flag is on (step S601). If the pre-reading notice execution flag is off (step S601; No), the prefetching notice execution setting process is terminated.

  If the pre-reading notice execution flag is on (step S601; Yes), 1 is subtracted from the value of the pre-reading notice execution number counter (step S602). Then, based on the value of the prefetching notice execution frequency counter and the prefetching notice effect control pattern set, settings for executing the prefetch notice effect are performed (step S603). In the process of step S603, it is only necessary to make settings for executing the pre-reading notice effect corresponding to the effect content shown in FIG. Further, in the case of the pre-reading notice effect control pattern for executing the stop symbol notice, a process for determining which of the chance eyes shown in FIG. 28 is to be stopped may be executed. In this case, instead of the non-reach combination determined in step S524 of FIG. 30, control for stopping and displaying the chance eye A or chance eye B is executed. If it is a pre-reading notice effect control pattern for executing background change notice, control for stopping and displaying the non-reach combination determined in step S524 in FIG. 30 is executed. In the case of a pre-reading notice effect control pattern for executing stop symbol advance notice, instead of the process of determining the non-reach combination in step S524 in FIG. May be executed. Also, before the step S524 in FIG. 30, the pre-reading notice execution setting process is executed, and when the chance to be stopped is determined, the process in the step S524 in FIG. 30 may be skipped. Good. By doing in this way, the duplication of the process which determines a stop symbol can be avoided.

  Subsequently, it is determined whether or not the value of the prefetching notice execution number counter is 0 (step S604). If the value of the prefetching notice execution number counter is not 0 (step S604; No), the prefetching notice execution setting process is terminated.

  If the value of the prefetching notice execution number counter is 0 (step S604; Yes), the prefetching notice execution flag is cleared to an off state (step S605). The case where the value of the prefetching notice execution number counter is 0 is a case where the current change is a change that is a target of the prefetching notice effect, and the prefetching notice effect ends. Thereafter, the prefetch advance notice execution setting process is terminated.

  After executing the pre-reading notice execution setting process in step S535, the presence / absence of execution of the changing notice effect and the changing notice pattern corresponding to the effect mode of the changing notice effect when executed are determined (step S529). . As an example, in the process of step S529, a pre-change changing notice determination table prepared in advance is selected and set as a use table for determining the presence / absence of changing notice effect and the changing notice pattern. In the floating notice determination table, a numerical value to be compared with the random value for determining the floating notice type according to the variable display result specified from the variable display result notification command, the fluctuation pattern specified from the fluctuation pattern designation command, etc. (Determined value) may be assigned to a determination result of “no execution” corresponding to the case where the changing notice effect is not executed, or a plurality of changing notice patterns when the changing notice effect is executed. . Thereafter, the effect control CPU 120 refers to the changing notice determination table based on the numerical data indicating the changing random number for the changing notice extracted from the random number circuit 124 or the random counter of the effect control counter setting unit 193, for example. Thus, the presence / absence of the changing notice effect and the changing notice pattern may be determined.

  In the process of step S529, for example, the presence / absence of the changing notice effect and the changing notice pattern may be determined at a determination ratio as shown in FIG. In the setting example of the determination ratio shown in FIG. 31 (A), the change notice is made depending on whether the change pattern corresponds to “non-reach lose”, “reach lose”, “big hit”, or “small hit”. The presence / absence of the performance and the decision rate of the changing notice pattern are varied.

  Specifically, when the fluctuation pattern is “Leach Loss”, the rate at which the changing notice effect is executed (ratio determined other than “No Notice Execution”) is greater than the case of “Non-Leach Loss”. When the fluctuation pattern is “big hit”, the percentage of the announcement effect during fluctuation is higher than when it is “non-reach lose”, “reach lose”, and “small hit” . In each change notice pattern, the ratio that the variable display result is “big hit” is high in the order of “notice Z”, “notice Y”, and “notice X”. With such a setting, it is possible to notify or suggest that the variable display result is “big hit” or that the reach is executed by executing the changing notice effect.

  Further, in this embodiment, when a specific pre-reading notice effect is being executed, the presence / absence of the changing notice effect and the changing notice pattern are changed at a special determination ratio as shown in FIG. Is to be decided. Specifically, in the case where the prefetching notice effect of the prefetching notice pattern SYP3-1 in which the background change notice is executed after the stop symbol notice is executed, before the background change notice is executed yet. In some cases, the presence / absence of the changing notice effect and the changing notice pattern are determined at a special determination ratio as shown in FIG. Note that when the pre-reading notice effect is being executed, the variable display result up to the change that is the target of the pre-reading notice effect is “non-reach loss”. Therefore, in FIG. Only shows. In the determination ratio of FIG. 31B, the ratio determined to “notice Y” is higher than the determination ratio in the case of “non-reach loss” in FIG. Is always determined as “notice Y”). With such a setting, when the pre-reading notice effect of the stop symbol notice is being executed, it is possible to indicate to the player that the background change notice will be executed according to the effect mode of the changing notice effect. Will improve.

  In this embodiment, when the “notice Z” changing notice effect is executed, the big hit reliability is higher than when the “notice Y” changing notice effect is executed. Therefore, the player may be discouraged when the notice effect during fluctuation of “notice Y” is normally executed. However, when the pre-reading notice effect of “preliminary notice Y” is executed when the pre-reading notice effect of the stop symbol notice is being executed, the ratio (pre-reading) of the pre-reading notice effect of the background change notice after that is executed. The ratio of the notice pattern SYP3-1) increases. The prefetching notice effect of the prefetching notice pattern SYP3-1 has the highest jackpot reliability among the prefetching notice effects. Therefore, when the prefetching notice effect of the stop symbol notice is being executed, the notice notice effect during the change of “notice Y” Even if is executed, the subsequent display result can be expected, the player's expectation can be maintained, and the interest of the game is improved.

  It should be noted that the effect mode of each changing notice pattern only needs to be different so that they can be distinguished from each other. For example, the notice X is a changing notice pattern for executing a changing notice effect for “character display”, and the notice Y is a changing notice pattern for executing a changing notice effect for “step-up operation”. Z is a changing notice pattern for executing the changing notice effect of “operation notice”.

  In the “character display” changing notice effect, an effect display in which a character image prepared in advance at a predetermined position is displayed, for example, on the display screen of the image display device 5 during the variable display of the decorative design.

  In the “step-up operation” changing notice effect, an effect of switching and displaying a plurality of kinds of effect images prepared in advance in a predetermined order, for example, on the display screen of the image display device 5 during the variable display of the decorative pattern. There may be an effect operation in which the effect mode changes (steps up) in a plurality of stages by the display. It should be noted that in the notice effect during fluctuation of the “step-up operation”, after any one of a plurality of types of effect images prepared in advance (for example, an effect image displayed first in a predetermined order) is displayed, The effect display in the changing notice effect may be terminated without switching the effect image. In the “step-up operation” changing notice effect, the effect mode is changed in a plurality of stages by, for example, an effect operation in which the movable member is operated in a plurality of types according to a predetermined order during variable display of the decorative pattern ( An effect operation such as stepping up) may be performed. In the “step-up operation” changing notice effect, the effect operation in the notice effect is ended without switching to the second-stage effect operation after the movable member performs the effect operation in one kind of operation mode. You may make it happen.

  In the "notice of operation" change notice, the display of the effect image on the display screen of the image display device 5, for example, is changed in response to the operation of the stick controller 31A by the player during the variable display of the decorative symbol. Or changing the sound output from the speakers 8L and 8R to change the rendering operation. As an example, in the changing notice of “operation notice”, a predetermined effect operation as an operation promotion effect is performed during the variable display of the decorative symbol. The operation promotion effect is obtained by, for example, displaying an effect image such as a character image or a message image prepared in advance at a predetermined position on the display screen of the image display device 5, thereby allowing the player to perform the operation of the stick controller 31 </ b> A in a predetermined operation mode. Any production operation that prompts the operation may be used.

  In this embodiment, the during-change notice effects of “character display”, “step-up operation”, and “operation notice” are executed at different timings from the start of change to the end of change. Specifically, the execution timing of “operation notice” is the earliest, and the execution timing of “character display” is the latest. Therefore, the big hit reliability differs depending on not only the effect mode of the changing notice effect but also the execution timing. Further, when the pre-reading notice effect for the stop symbol notice is being executed, it is possible to indicate to the player that the background change notice is executed according to the execution timing of the changing notice effect, thereby improving the interest of the game.

  After determining whether or not the changing notice effect is performed in step S529 and the changing notice pattern corresponding to the effect mode of the changing notice effect when executed, whether or not the suggesting effect is executed during the mission effect, When the suggestion effect is executed, the suggestion effect determination process for determining the type of the suggestion effect is further executed (step S529 +).

  FIG. 33 is a flowchart illustrating an example of the suggestion effect setting process. In the suggestion effect setting process shown in FIG. 33, the effect control CPU 120 first reads the EXT data in the change pattern specification command transmitted from the main board 11 to check whether the specified change pattern is the mission change pattern. It is determined whether or not (step S631). If the specified variation pattern is not the mission variation pattern (S631; No), the process proceeds to step S643.

  If the specified variation pattern is the mission variation pattern (S631; Yes), the effect control CPU 120 extracts the random value SR1 for determining the suggestion effect execution from the random number circuit 124 (step S632), and the mission variation pattern is restored. It is determined whether or not the variation pattern includes an effect (step S633). If the mission variation pattern is a variation pattern (PMC-1 to PMC-3, PMD-1 to PMD-2, PME-1) including a revival effect (S633; Yes), the effect control CPU 120 is shown in FIG. ) Is selected, the numerical data indicating the random value SR1 for determining the suggestion effect execution extracted in step S632 is the determination range of “execute the suggestion effect” or “not execute the suggestion effect”. And whether or not the suggestion effect is executed is determined (step S634).

  Further, if the mission variation pattern is a variation pattern (PMA-1, PMB-1 to PMB-3) that does not include the revival effect (S633; No), the effect control CPU 120 will perform the suggestion effect shown in FIG. The execution determination table is selected, and it is determined whether the numerical data indicating the suggestion effect execution random number SR1 extracted in step S632 is within the determination range of “suggest effect execution” or “no suggestion effect execution”. The determination is made and whether or not the suggestion effect is executed is determined (step S635).

  After executing either step S634 or step S635, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not execution of the suggested effect is determined in step S634 or step S635 (step S636). If execution of the suggestion effect is determined in step S634 or step S635 (S636; Yes), the effect control CPU 120 extracts the random number value SR2 for determining the suggestion effect type from the random number circuit 124 (step S637). Then, the suggestion effect type determination table shown in FIG. 23C is selected, and the numerical data indicating the suggestion effect type determination random value SR2 extracted in step S637 is “white”, “red”, “ By determining which determination range is “Sakura”, the suggested effect type is determined from these “white”, “red”, and “cherry” (step S638), and the suggested effect type for which the suggested effect type has been determined is determined. Setting is made (step S639).

  After executing step S639, or if execution of the suggested effect has not been determined in step S634 or step S635 (S636; No), the effect control CPU 120 determines whether the mission change pattern is a change pattern including a revival effect. It is determined whether or not (step S640). If the mission variation pattern is a variation pattern (PMA-1, PMB-1 to PMB-3) that does not include the revival effect (S640; No), the process proceeds to step S643, where the mission variation pattern includes the revival effect (PMC). -1 to PMC-3, PMD-1 to PMD-2, PME-1) (S640; Yes), it is further determined whether the mission variation pattern is PMC-1, PMD-1, or PME-1. Determination is made (step S641).

  If the mission variation pattern is not PMC-1, PMD-1, or PME-1 (S641; No), the process proceeds to step S643, and if the mission variation pattern is PMC-1, PMD-1, or PME-1 (S641; Yes), the effect control CPU 120 reads the control pattern of the final 5 seconds corresponding to the resurrection victory effect that is the common effect section from the change pattern “PMC-3” for executing the resurrection effect 3, and then transmits the mission change pattern ( The control pattern of the revival victory effect is set (set) in the process table of PMC-1, PMD-1, or PME-1 (step S642).

  When it is determined in step S631 that the specified variation pattern is not a mission variation pattern (step S631; No), in step S640, it is determined that the mission variation pattern is not a variation pattern including a revival effect (step S631). S640; No), when it is determined in step S641 that the mission variation pattern is not PMC-1, PMD-1, or PME-1, or after executing the process of step S642, When the execution decision for other suggestion effects and the execution decision are made, the setting for executing the other suggestion effects is performed (step S643), and the suggestion effect setting process is terminated.

  After performing the process of step S529 +, the execution execution setting during other variable display is performed (step S530). As an example, in the process of step S530, setting for executing an effect different from the pre-reading notice effect and the changing notice effect may be performed. As such an effect, for example, a predetermined sound effect (for example, an alarm sound, a chime sound, a siren sound, etc.) is output from the speakers 8L, 8R at a predetermined timing at the start or during execution of variable display. Among the effects of the aspect and the effects of the aspect in which the flash lamp included in the game effect lamp 9 or the like shines, the variable display result becomes “big hit” by executing the effect of a predetermined aspect including a part or all of it. An effect of a one-shot notification mode in which this is immediately notified (definitely notified) may be executed. Alternatively, as such an effect, an effect of displaying a special effect image (premium image) corresponding to the variable display result being “big hit” may be executed.

  As another example, in the process of step S530, regardless of the possibility that the variable display result will be a “big hit”, for example, a setting may be made to execute a predetermined aspect for liveliness. More specifically, it is only necessary to be able to execute an effect of a predetermined mode such as an effect of a mode in which a predetermined lamp included in the game effect lamp 9 shines.

  Thereafter, the effect control pattern is determined as one of a plurality of patterns prepared in advance (step S531). At this time, the effect control CPU 120 selects one of a plurality of special-figure variation effect control patterns prepared in correspondence with, for example, the variation pattern designated by the variation pattern designation command, and sets it as a usage pattern. For example, when the setting for executing the pre-reading notice effect of the character display notice is made, the notice effect control pattern corresponding to the setting may be selected.

  After executing the process of step S531, for example, the initial value of the effect control process timer provided in the effect control timer setting unit 192 is set corresponding to the change pattern specified by the change pattern specifying command (step S532). . Subsequently, the setting for starting the variation of the decorative design or the like in the image display device 5 is performed (step S533). At this time, for example, by transmitting a display control command designated by the display control data included in the special-figure variation effect control pattern determined as the use pattern in step S531, to the VDP or the like of the display control unit 123, etc. The variation of the decorative symbols may be started in the “left”, “middle”, and “right” decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R provided on the screen of the image display device 5. Thereafter, the value of the effect process flag is updated to “2”, which is a value corresponding to the effect process during variable display (step S534), and the variable display start setting process ends.

  Next, a specific example of control in the pachinko gaming machine 1 will be described.

  In the pachinko gaming machine 1, when the game ball that has passed (entered) the first starting winning opening formed by the normal winning ball apparatus 6A is detected by the first starting opening switch 22A, or the normal variable winning ball apparatus 6B is formed. Based on the numerical data indicating the random number values MR1 to MR4 extracted in step S209 of FIG. 17 when a game ball that has passed (entered) the second start winning opening is detected by the second start opening switch 22B, In S212, a winning random number determination process is executed.

  In the winning random number determination process, the symbol designation command and the variation category command are sent from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12 based on the determination decision in steps S403 and S404 in FIG. 18A and the determination result in step S412. Are transmitted.

  On the side of the production control board 12, for example, when the production control CPU 120 executes the prefetching notice determination process in step S161 in FIG. 25, or if the prefetching notice is not limited (step S704; No), the change up to the previous time If the category or the like is in a state in which the prefetching notice effect can be executed (step S709; Yes), the presence or absence of the prefetching notice effect, the prefetching notice pattern, and the like are determined in step S710 of FIG. Based on the determination result, the pre-reading notice effect is executed over a plurality of variations.

  FIG. 34 is a diagram illustrating a display operation example in the image display device 5 when the pre-reading notice effect of the stop symbol notice is executed. FIG. 34A shows the image display device 5 in which the variation of the decorative symbols is executed in the “left”, “middle”, and “right” decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R. Here, based on the fact that the game ball has won the first start winning opening formed by the normal winning ball apparatus 6A, the pre-reading advance notice determination process shown in FIG. Suppose that it was decided to execute. Since the number of reserved memories is 3 due to the winning at this time, the look-ahead notice effect control pattern SCP2-1 shown in FIG. 29 is set in the process of step S712.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 34 (B), when the variation at that time is completed, the pre-reading notice effect is started from the next variation. In the first change in which the pre-reading notice effect is started, as shown in FIGS. 34 (C) and (D), for example, the chance eye CB1 (“1 · 2 · 3”) is stopped. Here, which chance B to stop is determined in step S603 in FIG.

  Then, in the second fluctuation after the prefetching notice effect is started, as shown in FIGS. 34E and 34F, for example, the chance eye CB2 (“2 · 3 · 4”) stops.

  Subsequently, in the third change after the start of the prefetching notice effect (a change that is a target of the prefetching notice effect), a change corresponding to the determined change pattern is executed. Here, corresponding to the big hit variation pattern, as shown in FIGS. 34 (G) to (I), after the variation starts, reach is reached, and the decorative symbols constituting the big hit combination are stopped. .

  As described above, in the pre-reading notice effect of the stop symbol notice, it is possible to notify the possibility of a big hit or reach by stopping the predetermined chance eyes over a plurality of fluctuations. .

  FIG. 35 is a diagram illustrating a display operation example in the image display device 5 when the pre-reading notice effect of the background change notice is executed. FIG. 35A shows the image display device 5 in which the variation of the decorative symbols is executed in the “left”, “middle”, and “right” decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R. Here, based on the fact that the game ball has won the first start winning opening formed by the normal winning ball apparatus 6A, the pre-reading notice determination process shown in FIG. 34 is executed, and in step S710, the pre-reading notice pattern SYP2-1 is displayed. Suppose that it was decided to execute. Since the number of reserved memories is 3 due to the winning at this time, the prefetch notice effect control pattern SCP3-1 shown in FIG. 29 is set in the process of step S712.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 35 (B), when the change at that time is finished, the pre-reading notice effect is started from the next change. In the first change in which the pre-reading notice effect is started, for example, a letter “chance” is displayed on the image display device 5 as shown in FIGS. 35C to 35E, and the background image in the image display device 5 is displayed. The image changes from an image with the motif of the day (normal background image) to a background image with the motif of the night (special background image). Note that the stop symbol at this time is a decorative symbol constituting a non-reach lose combination.

  Then, in the second fluctuation after the start of the pre-reading notice effect, as shown in FIGS. 35 (F) and 35 (G), the background image continues with the night as a motif.

  Subsequently, in the third change after the start of the prefetching notice effect (a change that is a target of the prefetching notice effect), a change corresponding to the determined change pattern is executed. Here, corresponding to the big hit variation pattern, as shown in FIGS. 35H to 35J, reach is made after the variation starts, and the decorative symbols constituting the big hit combination are stopped. . Even in the third variation, the background image continues to be a night motif.

  As described above, in the pre-reading notice effect of the background change notice, it becomes a special background image that is different from the usual over a plurality of fluctuations, so that the possibility of becoming a big hit or reach may be noticed. it can. Although the stop symbol during execution of the background change notice is described as a combination of non-reach loses, the chance may be stopped also in this case.

  FIG. 36 is a diagram showing a display operation example in the image display device 5 when a pre-reading notice effect of a background change notice is executed after a stop symbol notice. FIG. 36A shows the image display device 5 in which the variation of the decorative symbol is executed in the “left”, “middle”, and “right” decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R. Here, based on the fact that the game ball has won the first start winning opening formed by the normal winning ball apparatus 6A, the pre-reading notice determination process shown in FIG. 34 is executed. Suppose that it was decided to execute. Since the number of reserved memories is 3 due to the winning at this time, the look-ahead notice effect control pattern SCP4-1 shown in FIG. 29 is set in the process of step S712.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 36 (B), when the change at that time is finished, the pre-reading notice effect is started from the next change. In the first change in which the pre-reading notice effect is started, as shown in FIGS. 36 (C) and (D), for example, the chance eye CA1 (“1 · 1 · 2”) is stopped. Which chance A to stop here is determined in step S603 in FIG.

  Then, in the second fluctuation after the start of the pre-reading notice effect, as shown in FIGS. 36 (E) to (G), for example, a letter “chance” is displayed on the image display device 5. The background image changes from an image having a day motif (normal background image) to a background image having a night motif (special background image). Note that the stop symbol at this time is a decorative symbol constituting a non-reach lose combination.

  Subsequently, in the third change after the start of the prefetching notice effect (a change that is a target of the prefetching notice effect), a change corresponding to the determined change pattern is executed. Here, corresponding to the big hit variation pattern, as shown in FIGS. 36 (H) to (J), reach is made after the variation is started, and the decorative symbols constituting the big hit combination are stopped. . Even in the third variation, the background image continues to be a night motif.

  As described above, in the pre-reading notice effect in which the background change notice is executed after the stop symbol notice, the background change that changes to a special background image different from the normal after the stop sign notice that the chance eye A stops is executed. By executing the notice, it is possible to notify the possibility of a big hit or the possibility of reaching.

  In addition, when the stop symbol notice that the chance eye A stops is executed, and after that, the background change notice is not executed, the biggest hit reliability is the lowest among the prefetch notice effects, but the background change notice is executed. In such a case, the reliability of the big hit is the highest in the pre-reading notice effect. Thus, by providing the prefetching notice pattern that changes (shifts) from the production mode indicating that the reliability is low to the production mode that indicates that the reliability is high, the prefetching notice production of the pattern with low reliability is executed. Even in this case, the player's expectation can be maintained, and the interest of the game is improved.

  Next, the aspect of the mission effect executed in the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS.

  First, as shown in FIG. 37 (A), when it is decided to execute a mission effect, the mission effect is executed on the display screen of the image display device 5 for a maximum of 1 minute (60 seconds). A guidance display for guidance is displayed, and the mission effect is started. When it is determined that the suggestion effect is executed in the mission effect, as shown in FIGS. 37 (B) to 37 (D), a screen on which the friend character and the enemy character face each other is displayed on the display screen. The suggestion effect is made according to the color of the mask worn by the enemy character.

  As shown in FIG. 37 (B), when the mask of the enemy character is “cherry blossom” color (pattern), it is suggested that only the battle effect 1 is executed in the mission effect. As shown in C), when the mask of the enemy character is “red”, this indicates that the battle effect from the battle 1 effect to the battle 2 effect is executed in the mission effect, and the enemy character mask. When the color is “white”, it is suggested that the battle effect from the battle 1 effect to the battle 3 effect is executed in the mission effect.

  Then, as shown in FIG. 38A, the battle 1 effect in which the teammate character and the enemy character attack each other is displayed on the display screen. At this time, if the mission variation pattern is “PMB-1”, the victory effect shown in FIG. 38 (B) is displayed after the battle 1 effect, and as shown in FIG. 38 (C), the big hit is won. Is notified.

  On the other hand, when the mission variation pattern is other than “PMB-1”, the divided effect shown in FIG. 38D is displayed after the battle 1 effect. At this time, when the mission variation pattern is “PMC-1”, the revival victory effect shown in FIG. 39E is displayed as the revival effect 1 without the revival line (FIG. 39A). As shown in F), the fact that the big hit is won is notified. When the mission variation pattern is “PMC-2”, the revival effect 2 is the revival speech A effect shown in FIG. 39 (B), the revival battle effect shown in FIG. 39 (D), and FIG. 39 (E). Are displayed in the order of the revival victory effects, and as shown in FIG. 39 (F), it is notified that the jackpot has been won. Further, when the mission variation pattern is “PMC-3”, the revival effect 3 is the revival speech B effect shown in FIG. 39 (C), the revival battle effect shown in FIG. 39 (D), and FIG. 39 (E). Are displayed in the order of the revival victory effects, and as shown in FIG. 39 (F), it is notified that the jackpot has been won.

  When the mission variation pattern is other than “PMB-1” and “PMC-1 to PMC-3”, the battle in which the ally character and the enemy character attack each other again after the division effect shown in FIG. Two effects are displayed (FIG. 38A). At this time, if the mission variation pattern is “PMB-2”, the victory effect shown in FIG. 38 (B) is displayed after the battle 2 effect, and the jackpot is won as shown in FIG. 38 (C). Is notified.

  When the mission variation pattern is other than “PMB-1 to PMB-2” and “PMC-1 to PMC-3”, the divided effect shown in FIG. 38 (D) is displayed after the battle 2 effect. At this time, if the mission variation pattern is “PMD-1”, the resurrection victory effect shown in FIG. 39E is displayed as the resurrection effect 1 without resurrection lines (FIG. 39A), and FIG. As shown in F), the fact that the big hit is won is notified. When the mission variation pattern is “PMD-2”, the revival effect 2 is the revival speech A effect shown in FIG. 39 (B), the revival battle effect shown in FIG. 39 (D), and FIG. Are displayed in the order of the revival victory effects shown in FIG. 39, and as shown in FIG.

  When the mission variation pattern is other than “PMB-1 to PMB-2”, “PMC-1 to PMC-3”, and “PMD-1 to PMD-2”, after the division effect shown in FIG. The battle 3 effect in which the ally character and the enemy character attack each other again is displayed (FIG. 38A). At this time, when the mission variation pattern is “PMB-3”, the victory effect shown in FIG. 38 (B) is displayed after the battle 3 effect, and as shown in FIG. 38 (C), the big hit is won. Is notified.

  When the mission variation pattern is other than “PMB-1 to PMB-3”, “PMC-1 to PMC-3”, and “PMD-1 to PMD-2”, FIG. A defeat effect is displayed. At this time, if the mission fluctuation pattern is “PME-1”, the revival victory effect shown in FIG. 39E is displayed as the revival effect 1 without the revival line (FIG. 39A), and FIG. As shown in F), the fact that the big hit is won is notified. The mission variation pattern is other than “PMB-1 to PMB-3”, “PMC-1 to PMC-3”, “PMD-1 to PMD-2”, and “PME-1”, that is, “PMA-1”. In this case, a disappointing effect (not shown) is displayed after the defeat effect shown in FIG.

  Although the embodiments of the present invention have been described with reference to the drawings, the specific configuration is not limited to these embodiments, and modifications and additions within the scope of the present invention are included in the present invention. It is.

  For example, in the above-described embodiment, when the variation pattern of the pseudo-continuous is determined, the suggestion effect or the like is not illustrated, but the present invention is not limited to this, and these pseudo-continuous Individual suggestion effects may also be implemented in the fluctuation pattern.

  In the following, a modified example in which a suggestive effect is implemented in a fluctuating variation pattern will be described with reference to FIGS.

  In the “pseudo-ream”, in response to the fact that one of the first start condition and the second start condition of the special figure game is satisfied once, the variable display result is displayed after the variable display of the decorative symbols is started. During the period up to a predetermined timing when the determined decorative symbol is derived and displayed, the decorative symbols are temporarily displayed temporarily in all of the “left”, “middle”, and “right” decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R. Then, effect display is performed for a predetermined number of times (for example, up to a maximum of two times) in which the decorative symbols are changed again (pseudo-variable) in all the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R. The number of quasi-continuous fluctuations is displayed for the left, middle, and right decorative symbols, excluding the first variation after all decorative symbols are temporarily suspended after the decorative symbol variable display starts. This is the number of times that the decorative symbols re-variate in all of the areas 5L, 5C, and 5R.

  In the “pseudo-ream”, in the “left”, “middle”, and “right” decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R, for example, a decoration that constitutes one of a plurality of types of predetermined pseudo-ream chances The symbol is temporarily stopped as a predetermined display result. Thereafter, pseudo continuous variation (re-variable display) is performed. In this modified example, in the “pseudo train”, the pseudo start variation (revariation) is performed once or twice, so that the first start condition or the second start condition is satisfied once, and the decorative symbol It is possible to make it appear as if the variable display was started 2 to 3 times in succession. Note that the number of pseudo continuous fluctuations (revariations) in the “pseudo-continuous” variable display effect may be executed up to more than once or twice, for example, three times or four times.

  In this modification, the “pseudo-ream” is a period from the start of the first variable display to the end of the last revariable display (at the time of derivation display of the finalized decorative symbol) (Note that the reach is established in the last revariable display) If there is, there is a variable display effect of decorative symbols executed during the period from the start of the first variable display to reach establishment).

  As the “pseudo-continuous”, it is only necessary to prepare in advance a plurality of types of patterns having different decorative pattern variations. In this modified example, pseudo-series A to C are prepared as “pseudo-series” (see FIG. 7, FIG. 40, etc.).

  During execution of the pseudo-ream A, the effect A1 is executed from the start of the variable display to the first temporary stop of the decorative design, and from the start of the first re-variable display to the second temporary stop of the decorative design. The effect A2 is executed in step S2, and the effect A3 is executed between the start of the second re-variable display and the reach establishment. The effects A1 to A3 are independent effects, and the effects A1 to A3 are effects that display, for example, a predetermined character image or moving image. The effects A1 to A3 are not only display operations in the image display device 5, but also sound output operations by the speakers 8L and 8R, lighting operations (flashing operations) in a light emitter such as the game effect lamp 9, and the like. An aspect may be included. The productions A1 to A3 may have a certain relevance, for example, at least a part of the appearance characters.

  During the execution of the pseudo-ream B, the story B1 is executed from the start of the variable display to the first temporary stop of the decorative design, and from the start of the first re-variable display to the second temporary stop of the decorative design. The story B2 is executed, and the story B3 is executed between the start of the second revariable display and the reach establishment. The stories B1 to B3 are displayed in the display area of the image display device 5 as an image representing a series of stories (for example, a story that starts with the story B1 and is completed with the story B3, or is completed with the reach effect executed thereafter). It is a production to do. The stories B1 to B3 are not only the display operation in the image display device 5, but also the sound output operation by the speakers 8L and 8R, the lighting operation (flashing operation) in the light emitter such as the game effect lamp 9, etc. An aspect may be included.

  During the execution of the pseudo sequence C, the effect C1 is executed from the start of the variable display to the first temporary stop of the decorative design, and from the start of the first revariable display to the second temporary stop of the decorative design. The production C2 is executed, and the production C3 is executed between the start of the second revariable display and the reach establishment. The effects C1 to C3 are effects that are independent of each other, and the effects C1 to C3 are effects that display, for example, a predetermined character image or a moving image. The productions C1 to C3 are not only display operations in the image display device 5, but also sound output operations by the speakers 8L and 8R, lighting operations (flashing operations) in a light emitter such as the game effect lamp 9, and the like. An aspect may be included. The productions C1 to C3 may have a certain relevance at least partially, for example, the appearance characters are common.

  In the case where each of the pseudo-series A to C ends with the first re-variable display, the stage A3, the story B3, and the stage C3 are not executed, and the pseudo-series ends (that is, a definite decorative symbol is derived and displayed). The variable display ends.

  It should be noted that effects such as effects A1 to A3, stories B1 to B3, effects C1 to C3, etc. executed during execution of each of the pseudo-series A to C may be referred to as pre-reach effects. Further, the pseudo-series A and C in which the effects A1 to A3 and the effects C1 to C3 are executed, which are non-story effects, are referred to as non-story pseudo-sequences, and the stories B1 to B3, which are effects constituting the story, are executed. The pseudo-ream B is sometimes referred to as a story pseudo-ream.

  As an effect operation in the reach effect, a plurality of types of effect patterns (also referred to as “reach patterns”) having different operation modes (effect modes) may be prepared in advance. Then, the possibility of being a “hit” (also referred to as “expectation degree” or “hit expectation degree”) varies depending on the production mode in each reach production. That is, it is possible to vary the possibility that the variable display result will be a “hit” depending on which of the multiple types of reach effects is executed. In this modification, as an example, reach effects such as normal, super A, super B, and super C are preset. And, when a super-reach reach effect such as Super A to C is executed, the variable display result may be a “big hit” compared to the case where only the normal reach effect is executed (expected expectation of big hit) Becomes higher. In addition, among the reach production of super reach, the big hit expectation degree when the reach production is executed in the order of super C, super B, and super A is high (that is, the big hit expectation degree when the super C is executed is high). The highest expectation of jackpot when Super A is executed is the lowest.) In this modification, after the normal reach effect is executed, the reach effect of super reach such as Super A, Super B, and Super C is executed. Note that the execution of super A, super B, and super C after the normal is executed may be expressed as “developed” from the normal reach production to the reach production of each super reach.

  The expectation degree of jackpot is, for example, (probability that the effect will be executed at the time of the big hit) × (probability of being the jackpot) / {(the probability that the effect will be executed at the time of the big hit) × (probability of being the big hit) + (other than the time of the big hit) (Probability that the effect is executed) × (probability of not winning the jackpot)} (when the big hit expectation is “1”, the variable display result is always “big hit”. Same for degrees).

  In this modification, the reach effect of Super A is executed after execution of pseudo-ream A in which re-variable display is performed twice (that is, the effect is performed in the order of pseudo-ream A, normal, and super A). The super-B reach effect is executed after execution of the pseudo-ream B in which re-variable display is performed twice (that is, the effect is performed in the order of the pseudo-ream B, normal, and super B), and the super-C reach effect is performed. Is executed after execution of the pseudo-series C in which the re-variable display is performed twice (that is, effects are executed in the order of the pseudo-series C, normal, and super C). In addition, after the execution of the pseudo ream B in which re-variable display is performed twice, a normal reach effect may be executed. In the following, the reach production that develops from normal to super A is collectively called super reach A, the reach production that develops from normal to super B is collectively called super reach B, and the reach production that develops from normal to super C. Are collectively referred to as Super Reach C, and normal reach production (no development) is sometimes referred to as normal reach (the drawings are the same as appropriate).

  Further, in this modified example, there is a possibility of being controlled by the big hit gaming state (in this modified example, the first specific gaming state. The same is true for the privilege suggesting effect) (the variable display result becomes “big hit” (specific display result)). A privilege suggestion effect that suggests (possibility) may be executed during the execution of the pre-reach effect or the reach effect.

  The privilege suggestion effect is, for example, a privilege suggestion effect that suggests that the possibility is higher when the privilege suggestion effect is executed than when the privilege suggestion effect is not executed. As will be described in detail later, in the privilege suggestion effect in this modification, the silhouette and the outline of at least a part of the image displayed in the display area of the image display device 5 are changed by executing the pre-reach effect and the reach effect. An effect of changing to an image of another different form (for example, a background image, a character image, or an image of an object with a changed color and / or pattern) and a pre-reach effect or reach effect are executed. Thus, there is an effect that the line of the character displayed in the display area of the image display device 5 is changed to another line and displayed. The privilege suggestion effect may be an effect in which the character displayed in the display area of the image display device 5 is changed to another character and displayed by executing the pre-reach effect or the reach effect. Further, the privilege suggestion effect may be an effect in which a message displayed in the display area of the image display device 5 is changed to another message and displayed by executing the pre-reach effect or the reach effect. In addition, benefits suggesting effects include adding new lines and messages to the original lines and messages and displaying them, adding lines and messages in the absence of the original lines and messages, etc. Is also included.

  In addition, the privilege suggestion effect is an effect in which a predetermined display image is changed from a normal image before reach or a reach effect (that is, an image without change) to another image, or the like, or the movable effect member 60 The movable effect member 60 is operated by moving from the retracted position to the front surface (advance position) of the display area in the image display device 5, and the electric parts for effects such as the speakers 8L and 8R, the game effect lamp 9, and the decoration LED. The sound effect may be output or the light emitter may be turned on.

  In addition to or instead of displaying an image on the display area of the image display device 5, the privilege suggesting effect is output of a sound effect or an illuminant by an electrical component for effects such as the speakers 8 </ b> L and 8 </ b> R, the game effect lamp 9, and a decoration LED. May be turned on. The privilege suggestion effect may be, for example, an effect executed by performing a predetermined operation on the operation button 30 or an effect of inserting a predetermined image into a pseudo-ream or reach effect.

  The privilege suggestion effect changes a part (including an image) of an effect mode in a pseudo-ream or a reach effect (including an image of a message or a message) (including an image of a message or a message). ), Operation of the movable effect member 60, and insertion or addition of images (including dialogue and message images), etc., and the effect suggesting the possibility of being controlled to the big hit gaming state. .

  The bonus suggesting effects are during the execution of the non-story pseudo-run (that is, during the pre-reach production performed with the non-story pseudo-run (productions A1 to A3, production C1 to C3)), super reach A, B, and It is executed during execution of C, and is not executed during execution of pseudo-series B which is a story pseudo-series (that is, during execution of pre-reach effects of stories B1 to B3) (see FIG. 40 and the like). When the privilege suggestion effect is executed in the stories B1 to B3, the privilege suggestion effect disturbs the stories B1 to B3. Therefore, during the execution of the pre-reach effect of the stories B1 to B3, the execution of the privilege suggestion effect is prohibited. Yes. Each privilege suggestion effect, when executed, includes a high privilege suggestion effect with a high jackpot expectation level and a low privilege suggestion effect with a low jackpot expectation level, and the privilege suggestion effect is executed at one timing. In that case, one of the privilege suggesting effects is executed alternatively.

  When the special figure display result, which is the variable display result of the special symbol in the special figure game, is “big hit”, a definite decorative symbol that is a predetermined big hit combination (specific display result) is displayed in the display area of the image display device 5. Derived and displayed. As an example, when the big hit type is “non-probability change” or “probability change”, the same on a predetermined effective line in the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R of “left”, “middle”, and “right” By deciding and displaying the decorative symbols all together, it is only necessary to derive and display the finalized decorative symbol that is a jackpot combination.

  When the big hit type is “non-probable change”, a definite decorative symbol that is a non-probable big hit combination may be derived. For example, the symbol number that is variably displayed in the “left”, “middle”, and “right” decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R in the image display device 5 is “1”. Among the decorative symbols of “8”, any one of the decorative symbols having the even numbers “2”, “4”, “6”, “8” is “left”, “middle”, “right”. The decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R may be stopped and displayed on a predetermined effective line, and may be a type of a fixed decorative symbol that is a jackpot combination. In this way, the decorative symbols having the even number “2”, “4”, “6”, and “8” constituting the non-probable variation big hit combination are referred to as non-probable variation symbols (also referred to as “normal symbols”). .

  When the jackpot type is “probable variation”, a definite decorative symbol that is a non-probable variation big hit combination may be derived, or a definite decorative symbol that is a probable variation big hit combination may be derived. For example, the symbol numbers that are variably displayed in the “left”, “middle”, and “right” decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R in the image display device 5 are the fixed decorative symbols that are probable big hit combinations. Among the decorative patterns of “8”, any one of the decorative patterns whose pattern numbers are odd numbers “1”, “3”, “5”, “7” is “left”, “middle”, “right”. The decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R may be stopped and displayed on a predetermined active line, and may be a type of a fixed decorative symbol that is a jackpot combination. In this way, the decorative symbols having odd numbers “1”, “3”, “5”, and “7” constituting the probability variation big hit combination are referred to as probability variation symbols.

  A re-lottery effect may be executed during the variable display of the decorative symbols in which the determined decorative symbol is a non-probabilistic big hit combination or a probable big hit combination. In the re-lottery effect, after the decorative symbols that are the non-probable big hit combinations are temporarily stopped and displayed in the “left”, “middle”, and “right” decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R on the image display device 5, for example, “ In the left, middle, and right decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R, the same decorative pattern is changed again, and the decorative pattern (probable variable pattern) that is a combination of the probabilistic big hit and non-variable is displayed. One of the decorative symbols (non-probable variable symbols) that is a probable big hit combination is stopped and displayed as a final decorative symbol (final stop display). Here, when the re-lottery effect is executed when the big hit type is “non-probable change”, as the re-lottery effect, the confirmed decoration that becomes the non-probable big hit combination after re-variation of the temporarily stopped display decorative pattern A re-lottery selection effect for deriving and displaying symbols is performed. On the other hand, when the re-lottery effect is executed when the big hit type is “probable change”, as the re-lottery effect, the confirmed decoration that becomes a probable big hit combination after re-changing the temporarily stopped display of the decorative symbols A re-lottery winning effect that stops and displays a symbol may be executed, or a re-lottery winning effect may be executed.

  When the big hit type is “probable change”, the decorative symbol that is a non-probable variable big hit combination is displayed once during the variable display of the decorative symbol, and the lottery effect is executed during the variable display, or the subsequent big hit gaming state A jackpot promotion promotion effect may be executed at the end of the middle or jackpot gaming state, and the start of control to be in a probable change state may be notified. The jackpot promotion effect is in the jackpot gaming state at the start of the jackpot gaming state, during the execution of the round in the jackpot gaming state, during the period from one of the rounds to the start of the next round in the jackpot gaming state Probability change notification is made as to whether or not to control to the probability change state in the period from the end of the final round to the start of the next variable display game. Note that a notification effect similar to the jackpot promotion effect may be executed during the first variable display game after the end of the jackpot gaming state. The jackpot promotion effect that is executed after the final round in the jackpot game state is particularly called “ending promotion effect”. These re-lottery effects and promotion effects during the big hit may not be executed, and the start of control to be in a probable change state may be notified.

  When the special figure display result is “losing”, the variable display form of the decorative pattern does not become the reach form, and the decorative pattern constituting the predetermined non-reach combination is stopped and displayed, so that the non-specific display result In some cases, a definite decorative symbol is derived and displayed. In addition, when the special figure display result is “losing”, the decorative symbols constituting a predetermined reach combination (also referred to as “reach lose combination”) are stopped and displayed after the decorative symbol variable display mode becomes the reach mode. As a result, a definite decorative symbol that is a non-specific display result may be derived and displayed.

  In this modification, the contents of the effects A1 to A3 and the super reach A, and the effects C1 to C3 and the super reach C are substantially the same except for the appearance characters. For example, FIGS. 50 and 22 show images displayed in productions C1 to C3 and super reach C, but in productions A1 to A3 and super reach A, they appear in (1-b), (1-e), and the like. Only the boy's character is changed to a different character, and the other effects are the same as when the effects C1 to C3 and the super reach C are executed. For this reason, in this modification, substantially the same privilege suggesting effects are performed in the effects A1 to A3 and the super reach A, and the effects C1 to C3 and the super reach C. The productions A1 to A3 and the super reach A, and the productions C1 to C3 and the super reach C may have completely different contents, and the privilege suggestion production may be different.

  In this modification, the privilege suggestion effect is being executed during the pre-reach effect (effects A1 to A3, effects C1 to C3) executed together with the pseudo-ream A or C (first in FIGS. 40A and 40C). It is possible to execute three times during the privilege suggestion effect period (privilege suggestion effects A to C), and once during super reach A or C (second privilege suggestion effect period in FIGS. 40A and 40C). It can be executed (privilege suggestion effect D), and can be executed three times during the execution of Super Reach B (third privilege suggestion effect period in FIG. 40 (B)) (privilege suggestion effect E to G). Note that the number of times that the privilege suggestion can be executed can be changed as appropriate. For example, a plurality of privilege suggestion effects may be executed in the second privilege suggestion effect period.

  As shown in FIG. 41 (A), the bonus suggesting effects are being performed during the execution of effects A1 to A3 (variation patterns PA2-6, PA3-3) and effects C1 to C3 (variation patterns PA2-8, PA3-5). In the first privilege suggestion effect period), during the execution periods of the effects A1 to A3 or the effects C1 to C3, the privilege suggestion effect A execution period, the privilege suggestion effect B execution period, and the privilege suggestion effect C execution period In each, it is executed as a privilege suggestion effect A, a privilege suggestion effect B, and a privilege suggestion effect C. As shown in FIG. 42 (A), the privilege suggestion effect is during execution of super reach A (variation patterns PA2-6, PA3-3) and super reach C (variation patterns PA2-8, PA3-5). It is executed as the privilege suggestion effect D in the privilege suggestion effect D execution period provided during the execution period of the super reach C. As shown in FIG. 43 (A), the privilege suggestion effect is a privilege suggestion effect provided during the execution period of super reach B during execution of super reach B (variation patterns PA2-7, PA3-5). In each of the E execution period, the privilege suggestion effect F execution period, and the privilege suggestion effect G execution period, the privilege suggestion effect E, the privilege suggestion effect F, and the privilege suggestion effect G are executed.

  Each of the bonus suggestion effects A to G is a high privilege suggestion effect in which the jackpot expectation degree when executed is higher than the low privilege suggestion effect, and a low privilege suggestion in which the jackpot expectation degree when executed is lower than the high privilege suggestion effect. In each privilege suggestion effect execution period, the privilege suggestion effect is not executed, the high privilege suggestion effect is executed, or the low privilege suggestion effect is executed.

  In the privilege suggestion effect determination process, whether or not the privilege suggestion effects A to G are executed and the content of the privilege suggestion effect when executing (whether the high privilege suggestion effect is executed or the low privilege suggestion effect is executed) are determined. Is done.

  In the privilege suggestion effect A executed in the privilege suggestion effect A execution period (provided in the first variable display period of the pseudo-ream A or C), the display area of the image display device 5 is used as the high privilege suggestion effect. There is a privilege suggestion effect (appropriately referred to as a privilege suggestion effect of serif 2) that displays an image in which the character's speech is changed to serif 2 and is displayed in the display area of the image display device 5 as a low privilege suggestion effect. There is a privilege suggestion effect (appropriately referred to as a privilege suggestion effect of speech 1) that displays an image in which the character's speech is changed to speech 1 (refer to “Serif 2” and “Serif 1” in FIG. 41B). ). For example, in this modification, the image displayed in the display area of the image display device 5 when the effects C1 to C3 are executed together with the pseudo-continuation C is the image shown in FIG. (1-i) which is an image is excluded.) When super reach C is executed, the image displayed in the display area of the image display device 5 is the image shown in FIG. The privilege suggestion effect A may be executed in the stage 1-b). Then, as a high-privilege suggestion effect, instead of the speech balloon image of the character (“...) Of the appearance character as shown in FIG. 54 (B), the speech balloon image of the speech 2 (“ It's super hot! ”). Display is executed. In addition, as a low privilege suggestion effect, a speech balloon image of speech 1 (“Chance is a chance!”) Is displayed instead of the speech speech image of the appearance character speech (“...”) As shown in FIG. Is executed.

  The privilege suggestion effect B executed in the privilege suggestion effect B execution period (provided within the period of the first revariable display of the pseudo-ream A or C) is the same as the privilege suggestion effect A in the high privilege As the suggestion effect, there is a privilege suggestion effect of the serif 2, and as the low privilege suggestion effect, there is a privilege suggestion effect of the serif 1 (see “Serif 2” and “Serif 1” in FIG. 41B)). For example, the privilege suggestion effect B may be executed at the stage (1-e) in FIG. Then, as a high-privilege suggestion effect, instead of the speech balloon image of the character (“...) Of the appearance character as shown in FIG. 54 (B), the speech balloon image of the speech 2 (“ It's super hot! ”). Display is executed. In addition, as a low privilege suggestion effect, a speech balloon image of speech 1 (“Chance is a chance!”) Is displayed instead of the speech speech image of the appearance character speech (“...”) As shown in FIG. Is executed.

  In the privilege suggestion effect C executed during the privilege suggestion effect C execution period (provided within the second re-variable display period of the pseudo-ream A or C), as with the privilege suggestion effect A and B, As a high privilege suggestion effect, there is a privilege suggestion effect of line 2, and as a low privilege suggestion effect, there is a privilege suggestion effect of line 1 (see “Serif 2” and “Serif 1” in FIG. 41B)). For example, the privilege suggestion effect C may be executed at the stage (1-h) in FIG. Then, as a high-privilege suggestion effect, instead of the speech balloon image of the character (“...) Of the appearance character as shown in FIG. 54 (B), the speech balloon image of the speech 2 (“ It's super hot! ”). Display is executed. In addition, as a low privilege suggestion effect, a speech balloon image of speech 1 (“Chance is a chance!”) Is displayed instead of the speech speech image of the appearance character speech (“...”) As shown in FIG. Is executed.

  The privilege suggestion effect D executed during the privilege suggestion effect D execution period (provided during the execution period of Super Reach A or C) is displayed in the display area of the image display device 5 as a high privilege suggestion effect. There is a privilege suggestion effect (appropriately referred to as a cherry pattern privilege suggestion effect) that displays an image in which at least a part of the image is a cherry pattern, and is displayed in the display area of the image display device 5 as a low privilege suggestion effect. There is a privilege suggestion effect (referred to as a red privilege suggestion effect as appropriate) that displays an image in which at least a part of the image is red (see “cherry” and “red” in FIG. 42B). For example, the privilege suggestion effect D may be executed at the stage (1-m) in FIG. In this case, as a high privilege suggestion effect, display of an image in which the background of the belt-like image (image displayed as “Woo!”) Shown in FIG. 54D is changed to a cherry blossom pattern is executed. Further, as a low privilege suggestion effect, display of an image in which the background of the belt-like image shown in FIG. 54C is changed to red (red is hatched; hereinafter the same applies to red) is executed.

  The privilege suggestion effect E executed in the privilege suggestion effect E execution period (provided during the execution period of Super Reach B) has a cherry pattern benefit suggestion effect. There is a suggestion effect (see “Cherry Blossom” and “Red” in FIG. 43B). For example, in this modification, the image displayed in the display area of the image display device 5 when the effects B1 to B3 are executed together with the pseudo-continuous B is the image shown in FIG. (2-i) which is an image is excluded.) When super reach B is executed, the image displayed in the display area of the image display device 5 is the image shown in FIG. There is a possibility that the privilege suggestion effect E is executed in the stage 2-k). And as a high privilege suggestion effect, the display of the image which changed the background into the cherry blossom pattern like FIG.54 (F) is performed. Further, as a low privilege suggestion effect, an image whose background is changed to red as shown in FIG. 54E is executed.

  The privilege suggestion effect F executed during the privilege suggestion effect F execution period (provided during the execution period of Super Reach B) includes a cherry pattern benefit suggestion effect as a high privilege suggestion effect, and a low privilege suggestion. As an effect, there is a red privilege suggestion effect (see “Cherry Blossom” and “Red” in FIG. 43B). For example, the privilege suggestion effect F may be executed at the stage (2-l) in FIG. In this case, as a high privilege suggestion effect, the display of an image obtained by changing a rock image to a cherry blossom pattern as shown in FIG. Moreover, as a low privilege suggestion effect, the display of the image which changed the rock image into red shown in (G) of FIG. 54 is performed.

  The privilege suggestion effect G executed during the privilege suggestion effect G execution period (provided during the execution period of Super Reach B) has a cherry pattern benefit suggestion effect as a high privilege suggestion effect, and a low privilege suggestion. As an effect, there is a red privilege suggestion effect (see “Cherry Blossom” and “Red” in FIG. 43B). For example, the privilege suggestion effect G may be executed at the stage (2-m) in FIG. In this case, as a high privilege suggestion effect, display of an image in which the background of the belt-like image (image displayed as “Drya!”) Shown in FIG. Further, as the low privilege suggestion effect, the display of an image in which the background of the belt-like image (image displayed as “Dry!”) Shown in FIG. 54 (I) is changed to red is executed.

  FIG. 44 is a flowchart for determining a privilege suggestion effect as another suggestion effect of step 643 in the suggestion effect setting process executed in step S529 + of FIG. 30 as the privilege suggestion effect determination process. In the privilege suggestion effect determination process shown in FIG. 44, first, it is determined whether or not it is a pseudo-continuous variation pattern (step S610). If the variation pattern is not a quasi-continuous variation pattern, the process is terminated. If the variation pattern is a quasi-continuous variation pattern, the effect control CPU 120 further determines that the variation pattern is a quasi-continuous sequence A or a pseudo-continuous sequence with one re-variable display. It is determined whether or not C is to be executed (step S601). The effect control CPU 120 determines the determination by determining whether the variation pattern designated by the variation pattern designation command transmitted from the main board 11 is any one of PA2-2 to PA2-4, for example. Do.

  Due to the fact that the variation pattern designated by the transmitted variation pattern designation command is any one of PA2-2 to PA2-4, the effect control CPU 120 determines that the variation pattern is a quasi-continuous A with one revariable display. Or when it determines with performing the pseudo | simulation continuous C (step S601; Yes), the execution content of privilege suggestion A to B is determined (step S602), and privilege suggestion effect determination processing is complete | finished.

  In step S602, for example, the effect control CPU 120 first updates the benefit suggestion effect A from the random number circuit 124 or the effect random counter provided in a predetermined area (for example, the effect control counter setting unit) of the RAM 122. Numerical data indicating the random value SR1 for determining the execution contents of B is extracted. The effect control CPU 120 is based on the extracted numerical data, and the privilege suggestion effect execution content determination table A (a numerical value (determination value) to be compared with the random value SR1 prepared and stored in advance in the ROM 121 is the privilege suggestion effect). By referring to the execution pattern (the pattern assigned to the execution details of privilege suggestion effects A to B), the execution details of privilege suggestion effects A to B are determined.

  Specifically, for example, the effect control CPU 120 determines (selects) the execution contents of the privilege suggestion effects A to B with reference to the privilege suggestion effect execution content determination table A based on the extracted numerical data. More specifically, for example, in the privilege suggestion effect execution content determination table A, the effect control CPU 120 changes the privilege suggestion effect execution pattern assigned to the determined value corresponding to the random value SR1 from the privilege suggestion effect A to B. The execution content of

  FIG. 45 shows an example of determining the execution contents of privilege suggestion effects A to B (execution pattern of privilege suggestion effects) in step S602. The effect control CPU 120 may determine the execution pattern of the privilege suggestion effect at a determination ratio as shown in FIG. In FIG. 45, “None” indicates that no privilege suggestion effect is performed. In FIG. 45, when the privilege suggestion effects A and B are both “none” (pattern 1-1), it indicates that the privilege suggestion effect is never executed. That is, the execution pattern of the privilege suggestion includes a pattern in which the privilege suggestion is not executed. In FIG. 45, “Serif 1” indicates that the privilege suggestion effect of the speech 1 is executed (that is, that the low privilege suggestion effect is executed), and “Serif 2” indicates that the privilege suggestion effect of the speech 2 is executed. It indicates that it is executed (that is, the high privilege suggesting effect is executed).

  As shown in FIG. 45, in this modification, a plurality of execution patterns of privilege suggestion effects A to B, that is, privilege execution effects A to B are prepared (patterns 1-1 to 1-6), of which One is determined as the execution contents of the privilege suggestion effects A to B. In this modified example, when the re-variable display of the pseudo-series is once, the variable display result is lost. For this reason, as shown in FIG. 45, in this modified example, when the re-variable display of the pseudo-ream is performed once, it is easy to select the execution pattern of the privilege suggestion effect in which the privilege suggestion effect is not executed. The production is difficult to execute.

  Due to the fact that the variation pattern designated by the transmitted variation pattern designation command is not one of PA2-2 to PA2-4, the effect control CPU 120 determines that the variation pattern is the pseudo-ream A or the re-variable display once. If it is determined that the quasi-continuation C is not to be executed (step S601; No), the fluctuation pattern is to execute the super reach A from the quasi-continuation A having two re-variable displays, or the re-variable display is It is determined whether or not the super reach C is executed from the two pseudo runs C (step S603). For example, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether the variation pattern designated by the variation pattern designation command transmitted from the main board 11 is any one of PA2-6, PA2-8, PA3-3, and PA3-5. The above determination is performed by determining.

  Due to the fact that the variation pattern designated by the transmitted variation pattern designation command is one of PA2-6, PA2-8, PA3-3, PA3-5, etc., the effect control CPU 120 changes the variation pattern again. When it is determined that the display is to execute the super reach A from the pseudo sequence A twice, or the re-variable display is to execute the super reach C from the pseudo sequence C twice (step S603; Yes) ), The execution details of privilege suggestion effects A to C are determined (step S604), the execution details of privilege suggestion effect D are determined (step S605), and the privilege suggestion effect determination process is terminated. In this modification, a common method (in the case of executing the pseudo-continuous A (effects A1 to A3) and super reach A and the case of executing the pseudo continuous C (effects C1 to C3) and super reach C ( That is, the execution contents of privilege suggestion effects A to D are determined by a method using a common table or random number), but the execution contents of privilege suggestion effects A to D may be determined by different methods.

  In step S604, for example, the effect control CPU 120 first updates the benefit suggestion effect A, which is updated by an effect random counter or the like provided in a predetermined area (for example, an effect control counter setting unit) of the random number circuit 124 or the RAM 122. Numerical data indicating a random number SR2 for determining the execution contents of C is extracted. Based on the extracted numerical data, the effect control CPU 120 uses a privilege suggestion effect execution content determination table B (a numerical value (determined value) to be compared with the random value SR2) stored and prepared in advance in the ROM 121 as a variable display result. By referring to the execution pattern of the bonus suggestion effect (the pattern indicating the execution contents of the privilege suggestion effects A to C) according to the case of “big hit” and “losing”, the privilege The execution contents of suggestion effects A to C are determined.

  Specifically, for example, the production control CPU 120 determines whether the variable display result is “big hit” or “lost” based on the variable display result notification command transmitted from the main board 11 and extracts the determination result. Based on the numerical data, the privilege suggestion effect execution content determination table B is referred to, and the execution content of privilege suggestion effects A to C is determined (selected). More specifically, for example, in the privilege suggestion effect execution content determination table B, the effect control CPU 120 corresponds to the determination value (“big hit” or “losing”) to the determined value corresponding to the random value SR2. The assigned privilege suggestion effect execution pattern is the execution content of privilege suggestion effects A to C.

  FIG. 46 shows an example of determining the execution contents of privilege suggestion effects A to C (execution pattern of privilege suggestion effects) in step S604. The effect control CPU 120 may determine the execution pattern of the privilege suggestion effect at a determination ratio as shown in FIG. In FIG. 46, “None”, “Serif 1”, and “Serif 2” are the same as those in FIG. As shown in pattern 2-1 in FIG. 46, when all of the privilege suggestion effects A to C are “none”, it indicates that the privilege suggestion effect is never executed. That is, the execution pattern of the privilege suggestion includes a pattern in which the privilege suggestion is not executed even once.

  As shown in FIG. 46, in this modification, a plurality of execution patterns of privilege suggestion effects A to C, that is, privilege execution effects A to C are prepared (patterns 2-1 to 2-9), of which One is determined as the execution content of privilege suggestion effects A to C. In this modification, as shown in FIG. 46, common execution patterns (patterns 2-1 to 2-9) are prepared when the variable display results are “big hit” and “losing”.

  As shown in FIG. 46, in this modification, when the variable display result is “big hit”, the determination ratio of the pattern 2-1 that is the execution pattern in which the privilege suggestion effects are not executed for the privilege suggestion effects A to C is the lowest. For the bonus suggestion effects A to C, pattern 2-2 is an execution pattern in which the low privilege suggestion effect (the privilege suggestion effect of serif 1) is executed at least once, and the high privilege suggestion effect (the privilege suggestion effect of serif 2) is not executed. To 2-4 are the next lowest, and the decision ratios of patterns 2-5 to 2-9, which are execution patterns in which the high privilege suggestion effects are executed at least once for the privilege suggestion effects A to C, are the highest. Yes. On the other hand, when the variable display result is “losing”, the magnitude relationship between the determination ratios is opposite to that for “big hit”. As a result, when the low privilege suggestion effect is executed at least once and the high privilege suggestion effect is not executed at least once, the big hit expectation degree is higher and the low privilege suggestion effect is not executed. The big hit expectation is higher when the high privilege suggestion effect is executed at least once than when the high privilege suggestion effect is not executed at least once.

  The patterns 2-2 to 2-4 have the same jackpot expectation, and the patterns 2-5 to 2-9 have the same jackpot expectation. For this reason, when the privilege suggestion effect executed in each privilege suggestion effect execution period is only the low privilege suggestion effect, the jackpot expectation degree is the same regardless of the number of executions of the low privilege suggestion effect. Moreover, when the privilege suggestion effect executed in each privilege suggestion effect execution period includes the high privilege suggestion effect, the jackpot expectation degree is the same regardless of the number of executions of the high privilege suggestion effect (and the number of executions of the low privilege suggestion effect). It has become. Thus, here, the big hit expectation degree differs depending on whether the low privilege suggestion effect or the high privilege suggestion effect is executed, not the number of executions of the low privilege suggestion effect or the high privilege suggestion effect.

  Further, in patterns 2-5 to 2-9 in which the high privilege suggestion effect is executed, the high privilege suggestion effect is executed at the first timing (for example, the privilege suggestion effect A execution period or the privilege suggestion effect B execution period). After being done, the pattern which a low privilege suggestion effect is performed in the 2nd timing (for example, privilege suggestion effect B execution period or privilege suggestion effect C execution period) after the 1st timing is not included. . That is, in the privilege suggestion effects A to C, it is prohibited to execute the low privilege suggestion effect after the high privilege suggestion effect is executed.

  Further, in patterns 2-5 to 2-9 in which the high privilege suggestion effect is executed, the privilege suggestion effect is executed at the first timing (for example, the privilege suggestion effect A execution period or the privilege suggestion effect B execution period). After that, a pattern in which the privilege suggestion effect is not executed at the second timing (for example, the privilege suggestion effect B execution period or the privilege suggestion effect C execution period) after the first timing is not included. That is, in the privilege suggestion effects A to C, it is prohibited that the privilege suggestion effect is not executed after the privilege suggestion effect is executed. That is, the privilege suggestion effect is always executed after the privilege suggestion effect is executed.

  Further, in step S605, for example, the effect control CPU 120 first updates the benefit suggestion effect by an effect random counter or the like provided in a predetermined area (eg, an effect control counter setting unit) of the random number circuit 124 or the RAM 122. Numerical data indicating the random value SR3 for determining the execution contents of D is extracted.

  Further, the effect control CPU 120 variably displays a privilege suggestion effect execution content determination table C (a numerical value (determination value) to be compared with the random value SR3) stored and prepared in advance in the ROM 121 based on the extracted numerical data. By referring to the execution pattern of the bonus suggestion effect (the pattern indicating the execution content of the privilege suggestion effect D) depending on whether the result is “big hit” or “losing”, the privilege The execution content of the suggestion effect D is determined.

  For example, the CPU 120 for effect control determines whether the variable display result is “big hit” or “lost” based on a variable display result notification command transmitted from the main board 11, and the determination result and the extracted numerical data are used. Based on the privilege suggestion effect execution content determination table C, the execution content of the privilege suggestion effect D is determined (selected). More specifically, for example, in the privilege suggestion effect execution content determination table C, the effect control CPU 120 corresponds to the determination value (“big hit” or “lost”) for the determined value corresponding to the random value SR3. The assigned privilege suggestion effect execution pattern is the execution content of the privilege suggestion effect D.

  FIG. 47 shows an example of determining the execution contents of the privilege suggestion effect D (execution pattern of the privilege suggestion effect) in step S604. As shown in FIG. 47, the effect control CPU 120 performs the privilege suggestion effect execution pattern (in this case, the privilege suggestion effect D is not executed and the privilege suggestion effect D is executed because the execution timing of the privilege suggestion effect is one time). What is necessary is just to determine the execution of the low privilege suggestion effect and the execution of the high privilege suggestion effect as the privilege suggestion effect D).

  In FIG. 47, “None” indicates that the privilege suggestion effect is not performed. In FIG. 47, “cherry tree” indicates that a cherry pattern privilege suggestion effect is executed (that is, a high privilege suggestion effect is executed), and “red” indicates that a red privilege suggestion effect is executed. (That is, the low privilege suggesting effect is executed).

  As shown in FIG. 47, in this modified example, a plurality of execution contents of the privilege suggestion effect D are prepared (whether execution is not performed, a cherry pattern privilege suggestion effect is executed, or a red privilege suggestion effect is executed), One of them is determined as the execution content of the privilege suggestion effect D.

  As shown in FIG. 47, in this modification, when the variable display result is “big hit”, the privilege suggestion effect D has the highest determination rate of no execution, and the determination rate of the high privilege suggestion effect is the next highest, The determination rate of low privilege suggestion production is the lowest. On the other hand, in the case where the variable display result is “losing”, the privilege suggestion effect D has the highest determination rate of no execution, the determination rate of the low privilege suggestion effect is the next highest, and the determination rate of the high privilege suggestion effect Is the lowest. The big hit expectation is the lowest when the privilege suggesting effect is not executed, and is highest when the high privilege suggesting effect is executed. As a result, the degree of jackpot expectation is lower when the privilege suggestion effect is not executed than when the high privilege suggestion effect is executed.

  Due to the fact that the variation pattern designated by the transmitted variation pattern designation command is not one of PA2-6, PA2-8, PA3-3, and PA3-5, the effect control CPU 120 displays the variation pattern again. Is determined not to execute the super reach A from the two pseudo-continuations A or to execute the super reach C from the two pseudo-continuations C (Step S603; No). ), It is determined whether or not the variation pattern is one in which super-reach B is executed from the pseudo-ream B in which the re-variable display is performed twice (step S608). For example, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether the variation pattern designated by the variation pattern designation command transmitted from the main board 11 is one of PA2-7 and PA3-5. Do.

  Due to the fact that the variation pattern designated by the transmitted variation pattern designation command is either PA2-7 or PA3-5, the effect control CPU 120 causes the variation pattern to be displayed in a pseudo-series B with two re-variable displays. When it is determined that the super reach B is to be executed (step S608; Yes), the execution contents of the G suggestion effects E to G are determined (step S609), and the privilege suggestion effect determination process is terminated. In addition, due to the fact that the variation pattern designated by the transmitted variation pattern designation command is not one of PA2-7 and PA3-5, the effect control CPU 120 has a pseudo-continuous display in which the variation pattern is displayed twice. Even when it is determined that the super reach B is not executed from B (step S608; No), the privilege suggestion effect determination process is terminated.

  In step S604, for example, the effect control CPU 120 first updates the benefit suggestion effect E, which is updated by the random number circuit 124 or the effect random counter provided in a predetermined area (for example, the effect control counter setting unit) of the RAM 122. Numerical data indicating the random value SR4 for determining the execution contents of G is extracted. Based on the extracted numerical data, the effect control CPU 120 uses a privilege suggestion effect execution content determination table E (a numerical value (determined value) to be compared with the random value SR4) stored in advance in the ROM 121 and a variable display result. By referring to the execution pattern of the bonus suggestion effect (the pattern assigned to the execution details of the privilege suggestion effects E to G) according to the case of “big hit” and “losing”, the privilege The execution contents of G are determined from the suggestion effects E.

  Specifically, for example, the production control CPU 120 determines whether the variable display result is “big hit” or “lost” based on the variable display result notification command transmitted from the main board 11 and extracts the determination result. Based on the numerical data, the privilege suggestion effect execution content determination table E is referred to, and the execution content of G is determined (selected) from the privilege suggestion effect E. More specifically, for example, in the privilege suggestion effect execution content determination table E, the effect control CPU 120 corresponds to the determination value (“big hit” or “lost”) to the determined value corresponding to the random value SR4. The assigned privilege suggestion execution pattern is the execution content of the privilege suggestion effects E to G.

  FIG. 48 shows an example of determining the execution contents of privilege suggestion effects E to G (execution pattern of privilege suggestion effects) in step S609. The effect control CPU 120 may determine the execution pattern of the privilege suggestion effect at a determination ratio as shown in FIG. In FIG. 48, “None” indicates that the privilege suggesting effect is not executed. As shown in the pattern 3-1 in FIG. 48, when all of the privilege suggestion effects E to G are “none”, it indicates that the privilege suggestion effect is never executed. That is, the execution pattern of the privilege suggestion includes a pattern in which the privilege suggestion is not executed even once. In FIG. 48, “red” indicates that a red privilege suggestion effect is executed (that is, a low privilege suggestion effect is executed), and “sakura” indicates that a cherry pattern privilege suggestion effect is executed. (That is, the high privilege suggesting effect is executed).

  As shown in FIG. 48, in this modification, a plurality of execution contents of privilege suggestion effects E to G, that is, privilege execution effects E to G are prepared (patterns 3-1 to 3-9), of which One is determined as the execution content of G from the privilege suggestion effect E. In this modified example, as shown in FIG. 48, common execution patterns (patterns 3-1 to 3-9) are prepared when the variable display results are “big hit” and “losing”.

  As shown in FIG. 48, in this modification, when the variable display result is “big hit”, the determination ratio of the pattern 3-1 that is the execution pattern in which the privilege suggestion effects are not executed for the privilege suggestion effects E to G is the pattern 3 -1 to 3-8 is the lowest, and the low privilege suggestion effect (red privilege suggestion effect) is executed at least once for the privilege suggestion effects E to G, and the high privilege suggestion effect (sakura pattern benefit suggestion effect) Patterns 3-2 to 3-4, which are execution patterns that are not executed, are the next lowest, and patterns 3-5 to 3 are execution patterns in which the high privilege suggestion effects are executed at least once for privilege suggestion effects E to G The decision rate of -8 is the highest. On the other hand, when the variable display result is “losing”, the magnitude relationship between the determination ratios is opposite to that for “big hit”. Furthermore, although the determination ratio of the pattern 3-9 which is the execution pattern in which the high privilege suggestion effect is executed is smaller than the other patterns, the determination ratio of the pattern 3-9 is from patterns 3-5 to 3-8. Similarly, the “big hit” is higher than the “losing” variable table result. As a result, when the low privilege suggestion effect is executed at least once and the high privilege suggestion effect is not executed at least once, the big hit expectation degree is higher and the low privilege suggestion effect is not executed. It can be seen that the jackpot expectation is higher when the high privilege suggestion effect is executed at least once than when the high privilege suggestion effect is not executed.

  The patterns 3-2 to 3-4 have the same jackpot expectation, and the patterns 3-5 to 3-8 have the same jackpot expectation. For this reason, when the privilege suggestion effect executed in each privilege suggestion effect execution period is only the low privilege suggestion effect, the jackpot expectation degree is the same regardless of the number of executions of the low privilege suggestion effect. Moreover, when the privilege suggestion effect performed in each privilege suggestion effect execution period includes the high privilege suggestion effect, the jackpot expectation degree is plural regardless of the number of executions of the high privilege suggestion effect (and the execution number of the low privilege suggestion effect). The execution pattern is the same. Thus, here, the big hit expectation degree differs mainly depending on whether or not the low privilege suggestion effect or the high privilege suggestion effect is executed, not the number of executions of the low privilege suggestion effect or the high privilege suggestion effect. ing.

  In addition, as shown in FIG. 48, in this modification, the predetermined execution pattern (pattern 3-9) has a determination ratio when the variable display result is “big hit” and “losing”, from patterns 3-1 to 3- It is smaller than 8 (3/100 and 1/100). For this reason, the pattern 3-9 is less likely to be executed than the patterns 3-1 to 3-8. Here, in pattern 3-9, after the high privilege suggestion effect is executed in the privilege suggestion effect A execution period, the privilege suggestion effect B that arrives at a later timing than the privilege suggestion effect A execution period. Executed in the period. Furthermore, after a low privilege suggestion effect is executed in the privilege suggestion effect B execution period, the privilege suggestion effect is not executed in the privilege suggestion effect C execution period that arrives later than the privilege suggestion effect A execution period. That is, the pattern 3-9 is a pattern that executes the high privilege suggestion effect at the first timing and executes the low privilege suggestion effect at the second timing after the first timing. Furthermore, the pattern 3-9 is a pattern that executes the privilege suggestion effect at a certain timing and does not execute the privilege suggestion effect at a timing later than the certain timing. However, this is not the case with patterns 3-1 to 3-8 that are easier to execute than pattern 3-9. Thus, in this modification, in the execution of the privilege suggestion effect, when the high privilege suggestion effect is executed at the first timing, the low privilege suggestion effect at the second timing after the first timing. Is difficult to execute. Furthermore, in the execution of the privilege suggestion effect, when the privilege suggestion effect (particularly the high privilege suggestion effect) is executed at a certain timing, the privilege suggestion effect is likely to be executed at a timing later than the certain timing. Yes.

  47 and 48, there is a possibility that a privilege suggestion effect will be executed during the execution of super reach A and C (the case where it is always executed is “1”; the same applies hereinafter). 47, in the case of “big hit”, 60/100 = 0.60 (determining rate of execution pattern in which the privilege suggestion effect is executed), and in the case of “losing”, 30/100 = 0.30 (privilege) The execution ratio of the execution pattern in which the suggestive effect is executed). On the other hand, the possibility that the privilege suggestion effect is executed at the time of executing Super Reach B is 93/100 = 0.93 (the determination ratio of the execution pattern in which the privilege suggestion effect is executed) in the case of “big hit”. In the case of “losing”, 57/100 = 0.57 (determining rate of execution pattern in which the privilege suggestion effect is executed). In this way, when the variable display result is “big hit” or “losing”, the possibility that the privilege suggestion effect is executed is higher when the super reach B is executed than when the super reach A or C is executed. It has become.

  FIG. 49 is a flowchart showing an example of processing executed as the variable display effect processing in this modification. In the effect processing during variable display shown in FIG. 49, the effect control CPU 120 first determines whether or not the variable display time corresponding to the variation pattern has elapsed based on, for example, an effect control process timer value (step S621). ). As an example, in the process of step S621, when the production control process timer value is updated (for example, 1 is subtracted) and an end code is read from the production control pattern corresponding to the updated production control process timer value, etc. It may be determined that the variable display time has elapsed.

  If the variable display time has not elapsed in step S521 (step S621; No), it is determined whether or not the present time is the pre-reach effect execution period for executing the pre-reach effect (effects A1 to A3, etc.). Determination is made (step S622). The pre-reach production execution period may be determined in advance, for example, in the production control pattern selected according to the variation pattern. When it is the pre-reach production execution period (step S622; Yes), the production control CPU 120 determines whether or not it is a special offer suggestion execution period (eg, a special offer suggestion A execution period) for executing the special offer suggestion. Is determined (step S623). The privilege suggestion effect execution period may be determined in advance, for example, in the effect control pattern selected corresponding to executing the privilege suggestion effect. When it is the privilege suggestion effect execution period (step S623; Yes), effect operation control for executing the pre-reach effect and the privilege suggestion effect is performed (step S624).

  As an example, in the process of step S624, in order to execute the reach effect and the privilege suggestion effect in a predetermined effect mode according to the effect control execution data (for example, display control data) read from the effect control pattern, various commands May be generated and transmitted to the display control unit 123 or the like. Thereby, the CPU 120 for effect control controls each device, and executes the pre-reach effect and the privilege suggestion effect.

  When the present is not the privilege suggestion effect execution period (step S623; No), the effect control CPU 120 performs effect operation control for executing the pre-reach effect (step S625). As an example, in the process of step S625, various commands are created in order to execute a pre-reach effect in a predetermined effect mode according to effect control execution data (for example, display control data) read from the effect control pattern. Then, it may be transmitted to the display control unit 123 or the like. Thus, the effect control CPU 120 controls each device and executes the pre-reach effect.

  When the current time is not the execution period before the reach effect (step S622; No), after executing the process of step S624 or step S525, for example, whether the current time is the reach effect execution period for executing the reach effect. Is determined (step S626). The reach effect execution period may be determined in advance, for example, in the effect control pattern selected according to the variation pattern. When it is a reach production execution period (step S626; Yes), the production control CPU 120 determines whether or not the current time is a privilege suggestion production execution period (privacy suggestion production D execution period or the like) for executing the privilege suggestion production. Determination is made (step S627). The privilege suggestion effect execution period may be determined in advance, for example, in the effect control pattern selected corresponding to executing the privilege suggestion effect. When it is the privilege suggestion effect execution period (step S627; Yes), effect operation control for executing the reach effect and the privilege suggestion effect is performed (step S628).

  As an example, in the process of step S628, in order to execute the reach effect and the privilege suggestion effect in a predetermined effect mode according to the effect control execution data (for example, display control data) read from the effect control pattern, various commands May be generated and transmitted to the display control unit 123 or the like. Thereby, the CPU 120 for effect control controls each device and executes the reach effect and the privilege suggestion effect.

  When the present is not the privilege suggestion effect execution period (step S627; No), the effect control CPU 120 performs effect operation control for executing the reach effect (step S629). As an example, in the process of step S629, various commands are generated in order to execute a reach effect in a predetermined effect mode according to the effect control execution data (for example, display control data) read from the effect control pattern. What is necessary is just to make it transmit with respect to the display control part 123 grade | etc.,. Thereby, the CPU 120 for effect control controls each device and executes the reach effect.

  When the current time is not the reach effect execution period (step S626; No), or after executing the process of step S628 or step S629, for example, based on the settings in the effect control pattern selected corresponding to the variation pattern, etc. In addition, after performing the production operation control including the variable display operation of the decorative design (step S630), the production process during the variable display is ended.

  On the other hand, when the variable display time has elapsed (step S621; Yes), it is determined whether or not a symbol confirmation command transmitted from the main board 11 has been received (step S631). At this time, if there is no reception of the symbol confirmation command (step S631; No), the variable display effect processing is terminated and waits. If the predetermined time has elapsed without receiving the symbol confirmation command after the variable display time has elapsed, predetermined error processing is executed in response to the failure to successfully receive the symbol confirmation command. You may make it do.

  If a symbol confirmation command is received in step S629 (step S631; Yes), for example, in a variable display of decorative symbols such as transmitting a predetermined display control command to the VDP or the like of the display control unit 123, for example. Control is performed to derive and display the final stop symbol (definite decorative symbol) that is the display result (step S632). In addition, a predetermined time is set as a waiting time for receiving the hit start designation command (step S633). Then, the value of the effect process flag is updated to “3” which is a value corresponding to the waiting process per special figure (step S634), and the effect process during variable display is ended.

  Examples of effects C1 to C3, super reach C, and privilege suggesting effects A to D executed by the series of processes described above will be described. For example, when PA2-8 or PA3-5 is selected as the variation pattern, reach is established after the quasi-continuation C is executed during variable display, and then super reach C is executed. In this case, for example, images as shown in FIGS. 50 to 51 are displayed in the display area of the image display device 5. The image in FIG. 50 is a representative image that is displayed in a period from the time when the effects C1 to C3 are executed and the reach is established, among the images displayed based on the variation pattern PA2-8 or PA3-5. It is. Further, the image in FIG. 51 is a representative image displayed in the super reach C among the images displayed based on the variation pattern PA2-8 or PA3-5.

  The first revariable display is started after FIG. 50 (1-c), the second revariable display is started after FIG. 50 (1-f), and reach is established in FIG. 50 (1-i). Then, super reach C is executed. Up to FIG. 51 (1-j), a normal reach effect is executed, and in FIG. 51 (1-j), a normal reach effect is developed, and a super C reach effect is executed. When PA2-8 is selected as the variation pattern, the variable display result is “losing”, so the image transitions from (1−m) to (1-p) and (1-q) in FIG. . When PA3-5 is selected as the variation pattern, the variable display result is “big hit”, so the image transitions from (1-m) to (1-n) and (1-o) in FIG. . As shown in FIG. 50, (1-b), (1-e), and (1-h) are displayed in the effects C1 to C3, respectively, but these effects are common to the effects C1. To C3 do not display images constituting a series of stories.

  Further, when the execution content (execution pattern) of the privilege suggestion effect is determined, the privilege suggestion effects A to D are appropriately executed according to the determined execution pattern.

  There is a possibility that the privilege suggestion effect A is executed at the stage of FIG. 50 (1-b) (the privilege suggestion effect A execution period provided in the execution period of the first variable display). Then, as a high privilege suggesting effect, a speech balloon image of speech 2 (“It's super hot!”) Is displayed instead of the speech speech image of the appearance character speech (“...”) Shown in FIG. Is executed. In addition, as a low privilege suggestion effect, a speech balloon image of speech 1 (“Chance is a chance!”) Is displayed instead of the speech speech image of the appearance character speech (“...”) As shown in FIG. Is executed.

  There is a possibility that the privilege suggestion effect B is executed at the stage (1-e) in FIG. 50 (the privilege suggestion effect B execution period provided in the execution period of the first revariable display). Then, as a high privilege suggesting effect, a speech balloon image of speech 2 (“It's super hot!”) Is displayed instead of the speech speech image of the appearance character speech (“...”) Shown in FIG. Is executed. In addition, as a low privilege suggesting effect, a speech balloon image of speech 1 (“Chance is a chance!”) Shown in FIG. 54 (A) is displayed instead of the speech speech image of the appearance character speech (“...”). Executed.

  There is a possibility that the privilege suggestion effect C is executed at the stage (1-h) in FIG. 50 (execution period of the second revariable display and the privilege suggestion effect C execution period provided before reach establishment). Then, as a high privilege suggesting effect, a speech balloon image of speech 2 (“It's super hot!”) Is displayed instead of the speech speech image of the appearance character speech (“...”) Shown in FIG. Is executed. In addition, as a low privilege suggesting effect, a speech balloon image of speech 1 (“Chance is a chance!”) Shown in FIG. 54 (A) is displayed instead of the speech speech image of the appearance character speech (“...”). Executed.

  There is a possibility that the privilege suggestion effect D is executed at the stage (1-m) in FIG. 51 (the privilege suggestion effect D execution period provided in the execution period of the super reach C). In this case, as a high privilege suggestion effect, display of an image in which the background of the belt-like image (image displayed as “Woo!”) Shown in FIG. 54D is changed to a cherry blossom pattern is executed. Further, as the low privilege suggestion effect, the display of an image in which the background of the belt-like image is changed to red as shown in FIG. 54 (C) is executed.

  Examples of stories B1 to B3, super reach B, and privilege suggestion effects E to G executed by the series of processes described above will be described. For example, when PA2-7 or PA3-4 is selected as the variation pattern, reach is established after the quasi-continuation B is executed during variable display, and then super reach B is executed. In this case, for example, images as shown in FIGS. 52 to 53 are displayed in the display area of the image display device 5. The image in FIG. 52 is a representative image that is displayed in a period from when the story B1 to B3 is executed and reach is subsequently established among images displayed based on the variation pattern PA2-7 or PA3-4. It is. 53 is a representative image displayed in Super Reach B among images displayed based on the variation pattern PA2-7 or PA3-4.

  The first re-variable display is started after FIG. 52 (2-c), the second re-variable display is started after FIG. 52 (2-f), and reach is established in FIG. 50 (2-i). Then, super reach C is executed. Until FIG. 51 (2-j), the normal reach effect is executed, and in FIG. 51 (2-j), the normal reach effect is developed, and the super C reach effect is executed. When PA2-7 is selected as the variation pattern, the variable display result is “lost”, and the image transitions from (2−m) to (2-p) and (2-q) in FIG. . When PA3-4 is selected as the variation pattern, the variable display result is “big hit”, so the image transitions from (2-m) to (2-n) and (2-o) in FIG. . Further, as shown in FIG. 52, (2-b), (2-e), and (2-h) are displayed in each of the stories B1 to B3, and these are images and images constituting a series of stories. It has become.

  Further, when the execution content (execution pattern) of the privilege suggestion effect is determined, the privilege suggestion effects E to G are appropriately executed according to the determined execution pattern.

  There is a possibility that the privilege suggestion effect E is executed at the stage (2-k) in FIG. 53 (the privilege suggestion effect E execution period provided in the execution period of the super reach B). And as a high privilege suggestion effect, the display of the image which changed the background into the cherry blossom pattern shown to (F) of FIG. 54 is performed. Further, as the low privilege suggestion effect, the display of the image whose background is changed to red as shown in FIG. 54 (E) is executed.

  There is a possibility that the privilege suggestion effect F is executed at the stage (2-l) in FIG. 53 (the privilege suggestion effect F execution period provided in the execution period of the super reach B). In this case, as a high privilege suggestion effect, the display of an image obtained by changing a rock image to a cherry blossom pattern as shown in FIG. Moreover, as a low privilege suggestion effect, the display of the image which changed the rock image into red shown in (G) of FIG. 54 is performed.

  There is a possibility that the privilege suggestion effect G is executed at the stage (2-m) in FIG. 53 (the privilege suggestion effect G execution period provided in the execution period of the super reach B). In this case, as a high privilege suggestion effect, display of an image in which the background of the belt-like image (image displayed as “Drya!”) Shown in FIG. Further, as the low privilege suggestion effect, the display of an image in which the background of the belt-like image (image displayed as “Dry!”) Shown in FIG. 54 (I) is changed to red is executed.

  In this modified example, the image display device 5 that performs variable display of decorative symbols and derives and displays the variable display result by the configuration as described above is provided, and a definite decoration that is a jackpot combination predetermined by the image display device 5 The pachinko gaming machine 1 that controls to the big hit gaming state (particularly the first specific gaming state) advantageous to the player when the symbol is derived and displayed is realized. This pachinko gaming machine 1 determines in advance whether or not to control the big hit gaming state before derivation display of the variable display result, and specifies from the start of the variable display until the display result is derived and displayed. The variable pattern PA2 in which the variable display is reached after the non-specific display result different from the display result is temporarily stopped and then the variable display is performed again one or more times (by performing the pseudo-ream). One of the plurality of variation patterns including −6 to 2-8 and PA 3-3 to 3-5 is selected. Then, the pachinko gaming machine 1 causes the image display device 5 to execute the variable display of the decorative symbols with the variation pattern selected above. Further, the pachinko gaming machine 1 can execute the bonus suggestion effects A to G that suggest the possibility of controlling to the big hit gaming state based on the determination result of the prior determination. Further, the re-variable display pattern includes privilege suggestion effects A to D in the first privilege suggestion effect execution period before the variable display of the identification information reaches the reach state and the second privilege suggestion effect execution period after. First change pattern that can be executed (for example, change patterns PA2-6 and PA3-5 in which super reach A is executed after effects A1 to A3, and PA2 in which super reach C is executed after effects C1 to C3) 8, PA3-5, etc.) and the second variation pattern (for example, from the story B1) that can execute the privilege suggestion effect only in the third privilege suggestion effect execution period after the variable display of the identification information is in the reach state. Variation pattern PA2-7, PA3-4, etc.) in which super reach B is executed after B3. Further, the pachinko gaming machine 1 receives at least one of the benefit suggestion effects E to G at a higher rate in the third benefit suggestion effect execution period than in the second benefit suggestion effect execution period in the second privilege suggestion effect execution period. Run.

  With this configuration, in this modified example, the third privilege suggestion effect execution period (that is, the execution period of super reach B) is more than the second privilege suggestion effect execution period (that is, the execution period of super reach A and C). Since it is easy to beat the expectation controlled to the big hit gaming state, even if a predetermined effect (story B1 to B3) in which the privilege suggestion effect cannot be executed is executed (that is, the privilege suggestion effect is Even if there is a period that cannot be executed), the super-reach B and the super-reach B are more likely to express the expectation, and for example, the effects that can be performed as a bonus suggesting effect (effects A1 to A3, C1 to C3) are executed. As in the case of being played, the expectation of being controlled to the big hit gaming state can be obtained, so that it is possible to reduce or prevent a decrease in interest in gaming. Executing at least one of the privilege suggestion effects E to G at a higher rate in the third privilege suggestion effect execution period than executing the privilege suggestion effect D in the second privilege suggestion effect execution period is, for example, a jackpot game Regardless of whether the state is controlled or not, it is sufficient that the probability of executing at least one of the privilege suggestion effects E to G is higher than the probability of executing the privilege suggestion effect D. In addition, when there are a plurality of points at which the privilege suggestion effect can be executed in the second privilege suggestion effect execution period or the third privilege suggestion effect period, the probability is, for example, at least one of the plurality of points. (Probability of executing the privilege suggestion effect one or more times).

  Further, in this modification, with the above configuration, the big hit expectation when the second variation patterns PA2-8 and PA3-5 are selected is the same as that when the variation patterns PA2-7 and PA3-4 are selected. It is higher than the big hit expectation. For this reason, even if Super Reach B is executed in a situation where the jackpot expectation of Super Reach C is higher than that of Super Reach B, Super Reach B is more likely to execute the bonus suggestion effect. Even in such a case, it can be expected that the game is controlled to the big hit gaming state.

  Further, in this modified example, the same number of re-variable displays are performed in the pseudo trains A and C and the pseudo train B by the above-described configuration. Is likely to be executed. Thereby, similarly to the above, it is possible to reduce or prevent a decrease in interest in the game. It should be noted that different types of re-variable display can be executed by a plurality of types of pseudo-reams (pseudo-reams A to C) for which super reach is executed later. In this case, the same number of pseudo-reams is executed. Sometimes, a person who performs a privilege suggestion effect in Super Reach B (third privilege suggestion effect period) performs a privilege suggestion effect rather than executing a privilege suggestion effect in Super Reach A or C (third benefit suggestion effect period). In this case, a decrease in interest in the game can be reduced or prevented as described above.

  Further, in this modification, as described above, the timing at which the privilege suggestion effect may be executed in the super reach A and C (second privilege suggestion effect period) (here, the privilege suggestion effect execution period) is 1. Times (privilege suggestion effect D), and the timing at which the privilege suggestion effect may be executed in Super Reach B (third privilege suggestion effect period) (here, the privilege suggestion effect execution period) is three times ( Benefit suggestion effects E to G). In this way, the third benefit suggestion production period has a higher sense of expectation that is controlled to the big hit gaming state because there are more timings at which the benefit suggestion production may be executed than the second benefit suggestion production period. As the number of points to be increased increases, for example, when an effect that can execute a bonus suggestion effect (effects A1 to A3, C1 to C3) is executed, a sense of expectation controlled to the big hit gaming state can be acquired, It is possible to reduce or prevent a decrease in interest in games.

  Moreover, in this modification, either of a high privilege suggestion effect and a low privilege suggestion effect can be executed at the first timing (such as a privilege suggestion effect E execution period) with the above-described configuration. It is possible to execute either a high privilege suggestion effect or a low privilege suggestion effect at a second timing (such as a privilege suggestion effect F execution period) that is later than the first timing, When the high privilege suggestion effect is executed at the timing of 1, it is difficult to execute the low privilege suggestion effect at the second timing. Moreover, by the above structures, either a high privilege suggestion effect and a low privilege suggestion effect can be performed at a first timing (such as a privilege suggestion effect A execution period). Either a high privilege suggestion effect or a low privilege suggestion effect can be executed at a second timing (such as a privilege suggestion effect B execution period) that is later than the first timing, and high at the first timing. When the privilege suggestion effect is executed, the low privilege suggestion effect is not executed at the second timing. In addition, for example, the high privilege suggestion effects executed at each timing and the low privilege suggestion effects may differ from each other in the possibility of being controlled to a specific gaming state when executed (for example, the possibility ( If the expected degree of big hit) has a width such as 0.1 to 0.3, it may be partially overlapped (details will be described later). According to the above, after the bonus suggestion effect having a relatively high jackpot expectation degree is executed at the first timing, the bonus suggestion effect having a relatively low jackpot expectation degree being executed at the second timing is specified. The expectation controlled by the gaming state can be made less likely to be impaired, and a decrease in the interest in gaming can be prevented or reduced. Note that the low privilege suggestion effect is less likely to be executed at the second timing. The high privilege suggestion effect is executed at the first timing when the high privilege suggestion effect is executed at the first timing. This means that the probability that the low privilege suggestion effect is executed at the second timing is lower than when it was not performed, for example, when considering a case where it is controlled or not to be a big hit gaming state, Alternatively, at least one of the times when the high privilege suggesting effect is executed at the first timing is lower at the second timing than when the high privilege suggesting effect is not executed at the first timing. This means that the probability that a privilege suggestion effect is executed is low.

  Furthermore, in this modified example, when a privilege suggestion effect is executed at the first timing (such as a privilege suggestion effect F execution period), the second timing (a privilege suggestion effect G execution period or the like) is configured. ), A bonus suggestion effect is easily executed. In addition, when the privilege suggestion effect is executed at the first timing (eg, the privilege suggestion effect A execution period), the privilege suggestion effect is always executed at the second timing (eg, the privilege suggestion effect B execution period). Yes. According to the above, after the bonus hit expectation is executed at the first timing and the bonus suggestion effect is executed, the expectation that the bonus hit expectation is not executed at the second timing is controlled to the specific gaming state. A feeling can be made hard to be impaired, and the fall of the interest to a game can be prevented or reduced. In addition, the privilege suggestion effect is more likely to be executed at the second timing. The privilege suggestion effect is not executed at the first timing when the privilege suggestion effect is executed at the first timing. This means that the probability that the privilege suggestion effect is executed at the second timing is higher than the time, for example, when considering whether or not to be controlled in the big hit gaming state, or at least one of each In the above, when the privilege suggestion effect is executed at the first timing, the privilege suggestion effect is executed at the second timing than when the privilege suggestion effect is not executed at the first timing. It means that the probability is high.

  Moreover, in the said Example, although the pachinko gaming machine 1 is illustrated as a gaming machine, this invention is not limited to this, This invention is applied also to other gaming machines, such as a slot machine. Can do. Hereinafter, a case where the present invention is applied to a slot machine which is an example of another gaming machine will be briefly described with reference to FIGS. 44 to 46.

  FIG. 44 is a front view of a slot machine 1001 to which the present invention is applied. The slot machine 1001 includes a housing 1001a having an open front surface and a front surface pivotally supported by a side end of the housing 1001a. Door 1001b.

  Inside the casing 1001a of the slot machine 1001, reels 1002L, 1002C, and 1002R (hereinafter, left reel, middle reel, and right reel) in which a plurality of types of symbols are arranged on the outer periphery are juxtaposed in a horizontal direction. As shown in FIG. 44, three consecutive symbols among the symbols arranged on the reels 1002L, 1002C, and 1002R are arranged so as to be seen from the see-through window 1003 provided on the front door 1001b.

  When a game is played in the slot machine 1001 of this embodiment, first, medals are inserted from the medal insertion unit 1004, or credits are used to set the number of bets. To use credit, the MAXBET switch 1006 may be operated. When a predetermined number of bets determined according to the gaming state are set, the pay lines L1 to L5 (see FIG. 44) become valid, and the operation of the start switch 1007 is valid, that is, the game can be started. It becomes a state. In the present embodiment, when the prescribed number of bets is set to three regardless of the gaming state and the prescribed number of bets is set, the pay lines L1 to L5 become valid. In addition, when a medal is inserted exceeding the maximum number out of the prescribed number corresponding to the gaming state, the amount is added to the credit.

  The winning line is a line that is set to determine whether the combination of symbols displayed on the perspective windows 1003 of the reels 1002L, 1002C, and 1002R is a winning symbol combination. In this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 44, a winning line L1 set across the symbols arranged in the middle stage of each reel 1002L, 1002C, 1002R, and the symbols arranged in the upper stage of each reel 1002L, 1002C, 1002R. The winning line L2 set in the above, the winning line L3 set across the symbols arranged in the lower stage of each reel 1002L, 1002C, 1002R, the upper stage of the reel 1002L, the middle stage of the reel 1002C, the lower stage of the reel 1002R, that is, lower right. There are five types of winning lines: a winning line L4 set across the arranged symbols, a lower stage of the reel 1002L, a middle stage of the reel 1002C, an upper stage of the reel 1002R, that is, a winning line L5 set across the symbols arranged in the upward direction. It is defined as.

  When the start switch 1007 is operated while the game can be started, the reels 1002L, 1002C, and 1002R rotate, and the symbols of the reels 1002L, 1002C, and 1002R continuously change. If any one of the stop switches 1008L, 1008C, 1008R is operated in this state, the rotation of the corresponding reels 1002L, 1002C, 1002R is stopped, and the display result is derived and displayed on the fluoroscopic window 1003.

  Then, when all the reels 1002L, 1002C, and 1002R are stopped, one game is finished, and a combination of symbols (hereinafter also referred to as roles) that are validated and predetermined on the winning line are each reels 1002L, 1002C, and 1002R. When the display result is stopped, a winning occurs, and a predetermined number of medals are awarded to the player and added to the credit. Further, when the credit reaches the upper limit number (50 in this embodiment), medals are paid out directly from the medal payout opening 1009 (see FIG. 44). In addition, when a combination of symbols with payout of medals is arranged on a plurality of winning lines that are activated, the number of payouts determined for each of the combinations of symbols that are activated and aligned on the winning line is totaled, The total number of medals will be awarded to the player. However, an upper limit (15 in this embodiment) is set for the number of medals to be awarded in one game, and when the total number of medals exceeds the upper limit, the upper limit number of medals is awarded. It will be. In addition, when the combination of symbols accompanied by the transition of the gaming state is stopped as a display result of each reel 1002L, 1002C, 1002R on the winning line, the gaming state is shifted according to the combination of symbols. ing.

  FIG. 45 is a block diagram showing a configuration of the slot machine 1001. As shown in FIG. 45, the slot machine 1001 is provided with a game control board 1040, an effect control board 1090, and a power supply board 1101, and the game state is controlled by the game control board 1040. The power supply board 1101 generates drive power for the electrical components constituting the slot machine 1001 and supplies the drive power to each unit. Note that the game control board 1040 and the effect control board 1090 may be connected via a relay board.

  The power supply board 1101 is supplied with AC100V power from the outside, and a DC voltage necessary for driving the electrical components constituting the slot machine 1001 is generated from the AC100V power supply, and the game control board 1040 and the game control board 1040 are generated. It is supplied to the production control board 1090 connected via the.

  Further, the above-described hopper motor 1034b, payout sensor 1034c, full tank sensor 1035a, setting key switch 1037, reset / setting switch 1038, and power switch 1039 are connected to the power supply board 1101.

  On the game control board 1040, the above-described MAXBET switch 1006, start switch 1007, stop switches 1008L, 1008C, 1008R, settlement switch 1010, reset switch 1023, stop switch 1036a, automatic settlement switch 1036b, insertion medal sensor 1031, door opening The detection switch 1025, reel sensors 1033L, 1033C, and 1033R are connected, and the above-described payout sensor 1034c, full tank sensor 1035a, setting key switch 1037, and reset / setting switch 1038 are connected via the power supply board 1101. Detection signals from these connected switches are input.

  The game control board 1040 includes the credit display 1011, the game auxiliary display 1012, the payout display 1013, 1 to 3 BET LEDs 1014 to 1016, the insertion request LED 1017, the start valid LED 1018, the waiting LED 1019, the replaying LED 1020, and the BET A switch valid LED 1021, left, middle, and right stop valid LEDs 1022L, 1022C, 1022R, a set value display 1024, a flow path switching solenoid 1030, reel motors 1032L, 1032C, 1032R are connected to each other, and are described above via the power supply board 1101. The hopper motor 1034b is connected, and these electric components are driven based on the control of a main control unit 1041 described later mounted on the game control board 1040.

  The game control board 1040 is composed of a microcomputer having a main CPU 1041a, ROM 1041b, RAM 1041c, and I / O port 1041d, and a main control unit 1041 for controlling the game, a random number in a predetermined range (0 to 65535 in this embodiment). , A pulse oscillator 1043 for supplying a constant frequency clock signal to the random number circuit 1042, and detection signals input from switches connected to the game control board 10040 directly or via the power supply board 1101 A switch detection circuit 1044, a motor drive circuit 1045 that controls the drive of the reel motors 1032L, 1032C, and 1032R, a solenoid drive circuit 1046 that controls the drive of the flow path switching solenoid 1030, various displays connected to the game control board 1040, The LED drive circuit 1047 that controls the driving of the ED and the power supply voltage supplied to the slot machine 1001 are monitored, and when a voltage drop is detected, a voltage drop signal indicating that is output to the main control unit 1041. A disconnection detection circuit 1048, a reset circuit 1049 for supplying a reset signal to the main CPU 1041a when power is turned on or when an initialization command is not input from the main CPU 1041a, and other various devices and circuits are mounted.

  The main CPU 1041a has an interrupt function (including an interrupt prohibition function) such as a timekeeping function and a timer interrupt, and executes a program (described later) stored in the ROM 1041b to perform various control processes related to the progress of the game. In addition, each part of the control circuit mounted on the game control board 1040 is controlled directly or indirectly. The ROM 1041b stores fixed data such as programs executed by the main CPU 1041a and various tables. The RAM 1041c is used as a work area when the main CPU 1041a executes a program. The I / O port 1041d inputs / outputs a control signal to / from each circuit connected via a signal input / output terminal included in the main control unit 1041.

  The main control unit 1041 is also supplied with backup power even during a power failure, and the data stored in the RAM 1041c is held while the backup power is being supplied.

  The main CPU 1041a transmits various commands to the effect control board 1090 via the I / O port 1041d.

  An effect switch 1056 is connected to the effect control board 1090, and when the detection signal corresponding to each direction of the cross key in the effect switch 1056 is input, the effect control board 1090 is operated by the player. It is possible to grasp the specified direction according to presence / absence and operation.

  The effect control board 1090 includes an effect display device 1050 having an image liquid crystal panel 1051 (see FIG. 44) disposed on the front door 1001b of the slot machine 1001, an effect effect LED 1052, a speaker as shown in FIG. 1053 (see FIG. 45) and the above-described effect devices such as the reel LED 1055 are connected, and these effect devices are driven based on control by a sub-control unit 1091 described later mounted on the effect control board 1090. It is like that.

  In this embodiment, the sub-control unit 1091 mounted on the effect control board 1090 controls the output of the effect devices such as the image liquid crystal panel 1051, effect effect LED 1052, speakers 1053, 1054, and reel LED 1055. However, an output control unit that directly controls the output of the effect device is mounted on the effect control board 1090 or another board separately from the sub control part 1091, and the sub control part 1091 is based on a command from the main control part 1041. The output pattern of the effect device may be determined, and the output control unit may control the output of the effect device based on the output pattern determined by the sub control unit 1091. In such a configuration, the sub control unit 1091 and the output are controlled. The output control of the effect device is performed by both of the control units.

  In the present embodiment, the image liquid crystal panel 1051, the effect effect LED 1052, the speakers 1053 and 1054, and the reel LED 1055 are illustrated as the effect devices. However, the effect device is not limited to these, and is mechanically driven, for example. A display device or a mechanically driven item may be applied as the rendering device.

  The effect control board 1090 is composed of a microcomputer having a sub CPU 1091a, ROM 1091b, RAM 1091c, and I / O port 1091d in the same manner as the main control part 1041, and includes a sub control part 1091 for effect control and an effect control board 1090. Display control circuit 1092 for controlling the display of the image liquid crystal panel 1051 connected to the LED, an LED driving circuit 1093 for controlling the driving of the effect LED 1052 and the reel LED 1055, and an audio output circuit 1094 for controlling audio output from the speakers 1053 and 1054. From the reset circuit 1095 that gives a reset signal to the sub CPU 1091a when the power is turned on or when the initialization command from the sub CPU 1091a is not input for a certain period of time, and the effect switch 1056 connected to the effect control board 1090 A switch detection circuit 1096 that detects the detected detection signal, a clock device 1097 that outputs time information including date information and time information, and a power supply voltage supplied to the slot machine 1001 are monitored, and when a voltage drop is detected, The power interruption detection circuit 1098 that outputs a voltage drop signal indicating that to the sub CPU 1091a, and other circuits are mounted. The sub CPU 1091a receives a command transmitted from the game control board 1040, and produces an effect. In addition to performing various controls for performing the above, each part of the control circuit mounted on the effect control board 1090 is controlled directly or indirectly.

  The slot machine 1001 is activated when all the reels 1002L, 1002C, and 1002R are stopped (in the present embodiment, since all the winning lines are always activated, in the following, it is activated). The winning line is simply called a winning line), and a combination of symbols called “comb” is combined to win. The combination may be a combination of the same symbols or a combination including different symbols. The type of winning combination is determined according to the game state, but it can be roughly divided into a small role with payout of medals and a replay that can start the next game without the need to set the number of bets. There are a game combination and a special combination with a transition to a game state advantageous to the player. A small role and a replay role are collectively called a general role. In order to win each winning combination determined according to the gaming state, it is necessary to win an internal lottery to be described later and set a winning flag for the winning combination in the RAM.

  Of the winning flags for each of these combinations, the winning flag for the small role and the re-playing role is valid only in the game in which the flag is set, and is invalid in the next game. It is valid until a combination of combinations permitted by the flag is completed, and is invalid in a game having a combination of combinations permitted. In other words, once the special combination winning flag is won, even if the combination of the combinations permitted by the flag cannot be made, the winning flag is not invalidated and is carried over to the next game. It becomes.

  In the internal lottery, it is determined whether or not the above winning combination is permitted before the display results of all the reels 1002L, 1002C, and 1002R are derived and displayed (actually, when the start switch 1007 is detected). To do. In the internal lottery, first, when the start switch 1007 is detected, an internal lottery random value (an integer from 0 to 65535) is acquired. Specifically, the value of the random number storage work assigned to the RAM is set as the lottery work assigned to the RAM. And, for each combination determined according to the gaming state and whether or not the special combination is carried over, the numerical data stored in the lottery work, the value of the gaming state flag for specifying the gaming state, the number of bets and the set value It is performed according to the number of judgment values of each combination determined according to

  In the internal lottery, an internal lottery target, a current gaming state flag value, an RT flag value, and the number of determination values determined corresponding to the set value are stored in a random number for internal lottery (a lottery work). When the result of addition overflows, it is determined that the winning combination is won. For this reason, a winning combination will be won with a probability (number of determination values / 65536) according to the number of determination values.

  If a winning combination of any combination is determined, a winning flag corresponding to the combination determined to be winning is set in the internal winning flag storing work assigned to the RAM. The internal winning flag storage work consists of a 2-byte storage area, of which the upper byte is assigned as the special role storing work in which the winning flag for the special role is set, and the lower byte is the winning of the general role It is assigned as a general role storage work for which a flag is set. Specifically, when a special combination is won, a special combination winning flag indicating that the special combination is won is set in the special combination storing work, and the winning flag set in the general combination storing work is cleared. When a general combination is won, a winning flag for the general combination indicating that the general combination is won is set in the general combination storing work. If no winning combination is selected, only the general winning combination work is cleared.

  When the main control unit 1041 effectively detects one of the stop switches 1008L, 1008C, and 1008R corresponding to the rotating reel, the control when the display result is derived to the corresponding reel will be described. When any of the stop switches 1008L, 1008C, and 1008R corresponding to the rotating reel is detected effectively, the area number of the stop operation position is based on the number of steps from the reel reference position at the time when the stop operation is detected. And the number of sliding symbols corresponding to the area number of the specified stop operation position is obtained by referring to the stop control table of the reel where the stop operation is detected. Then, control is performed to rotate and stop the reel by the number of acquired sliding frames. Specifically, from the number of steps from the reel reference position at the time when the stop operation is detected, the number of steps from the acquired number of sliding frames to the stop is calculated, and the reel is rotated and stopped by the calculated number of steps. Take control. As a result, the region corresponding to the region number that is the stop position that is the number of sliding frames ahead of the region corresponding to the region number of the stop operation position where the stop operation is detected is the stop reference position (in this embodiment, the perspective window 1003 It will stop in the lower symbol area).

  If you win any of the winning roles, the maximum number of winning symbols will be drawn on the winning line in the range of 4 frames, and the number of sliding symbols will be determined so that the winning characters will not be aligned on the winning line. A stop control table is created and reel stop control is performed.If none of the winning combinations is won, a stop control table with a number of sliding symbols that does not match any of the roles is created and the reels are controlled. Perform stop control. As a result, when a stop operation is performed, if the winning combination can be stopped on the winning line in the drawing range of up to 4 frames, the control is performed so that the winning combination is stopped. The combination that has not been performed will be controlled to be stopped in a drawing range of a maximum of 4 frames.

  In addition, the slot machine 1001 according to the present embodiment has an assist time (so-called AT) that is a notification period in which the sub-control unit 1091 can execute a navigation effect that notifies the internal lottery result when the gaming state is a predetermined state. The effect state is controlled, and in these AT states, the internal winning winning combination can be won almost certainly, so that it becomes a gaming state advantageous to the player.

  In this slot machine 1001, as in the case of the pachinko gaming machine 1, when a predetermined mission effect execution condition is established, for example, winning an AT winning combination that shifts to the AT state, winning a mission effect execution lottery, etc. As shown in FIG. 55, an instruction to accomplish the mission is displayed and notified during the 1-minute mission, and the mission effect production patterns (combination of battle 1 to battle 3, revival production 1 to revival production 3) Any one may be determined in the same manner as in the case of the pachinko gaming machine 1 and the determined effect pattern may be executed.

  In this way, the main control unit 1041 of the slot machine 1001 corresponds to the game control microcomputer 100 in the pachinko gaming machine 1, and can perform the same processing as the game control microcomputer 100 described above. The sub-control unit 1091 of the slot machine 1001 corresponds to the effect control CPU 120 in the pachinko gaming machine 1, and can perform the same processing as the effect control CPU 120 described above.

  That is, the slot machine 1001 has variable display means capable of variably displaying a plurality of types of identification information each identifiable, and the first special display until one display result is displayed on the variable display means. Predetermining means for deciding whether or not display of any display result among a plurality of display results including the display result and the second special display result and the determination result determined by the predetermination means The variable display control means for controlling the variable display means to display the display result based on the display, and the specific display state advantageous to the player based on the display of the special display result on the variable display means. While notifying the game control means and a predetermined fixed period for achieving the predetermined task, either the first effect that achieves the predetermined task or the second effect that does not achieve the predetermined task The success / failure effect execution means capable of executing the success / failure effect as to whether or not to achieve the predetermined task by performing the above-mentioned and the predetermined effect different from the first effect is achieved. Special effect execution means capable of executing one special effect among a plurality of types of special effects having different effect periods when the second effect is performed, following the second effect; And the special effect execution means, when the execution timing of the special effect is the second timing later than the first timing, the special effect having a shorter effect period at a higher rate than when the special effect is performed. A gaming machine to be executed.

  The pre-determining means “determines whether or not to allow display of any display result” not only determines whether or not to allow individual display results to be displayed individually, This includes determining only one display result that permits display from among the display results.

  As described above, as an example of the slot machine 1001 as another gaming machine, the gaming machine of the present invention is not limited to the pachinko gaming machine 1 and may be a slot machine that uses medals as gaming media. Furthermore, these game media are enclosed in the gaming machine, and the number of pachinko balls and medals lent out and the number of pachinko balls and medals awarded according to winnings are added, while being used for games. Enclosed game machines in which the number of pachinko balls and medals are subtracted and stored, and without using pachinko balls and medals It may be a gaming machine that stores all values such as points and points given as credits and can play a game using only the values stored as credits. In this case, these points, points, and the like correspond to game media, and credits become game value.

  Further, in the above-described embodiment, the variation pattern of all mission effects from PMA-1 to PME-1 is determined on the main board 11 (game control microcomputer 100) side. For example, on the main board 11 (game control microcomputer 100) side, only the variable display time is determined to be 60 seconds, for example, and PMC-3 and PMD2 corresponding to the 60 seconds are determined. The effect control pattern from PME-1 to 1 may be determined on the effect control CPU 120 side.

  Moreover, in the said Example, although it is made to perform the revival production | generation 3 which can be determined only in the timing of the battle 2, for example, it is the peculiar special production made specific to the production timing of a battle production, but this invention Is not limited to this, and may not execute these unique special effects.

  Moreover, in the said Example, although the form which implements a suggestion effect is illustrated, this invention is not limited to this, It is good also as a structure which does not implement these suggestion effects. Moreover, although the implementation timing of the suggestion effect is set to a predetermined timing before the battle 1 in the mission effect, the present invention is not limited to this, and the suggestion effect is performed at a timing other than the predetermined timing before the battle 1. You may do it,

  Moreover, in the said Example, when the resurrection effects 1-3 are implemented, possibility that it will become a probable big hit is large, but it is not necessarily a probable big hit, but this invention is not limited to this. In the case where the revival effects 1 to 3 are performed, it is possible to be sure to have a promising big hit.

  Moreover, in the said Example, when the resurrection effects 1-3 are implemented, the form with a large possibility of becoming a probable big hit is illustrated, but this invention is not limited to this, A resurrection effect When 1 to 3 are implemented, it is advantageous whether special effects are implemented or not implemented, such as a big jackpot with a large number of rounds among large jackpots with different numbers of rounds. What is necessary is just to become a ratio with a high ratio to which a high game value is given.

  Further, in the above-described embodiment, the data capacity can be reduced by not providing the data for the resurrection effect 1 individually by performing the end part of the resurrection effect 2 for the resurrection effect 1 having the shortest time. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and effect data for the revival effect 1 may be provided individually.

  In the embodiment, when the pre-reading notice effect of the background change notice is executed, the timing of changing from the normal background image to the special background image is not particularly mentioned, but the background change notice is executed. You may make it change at which timing in a fluctuation | variation whether it changes from a normal background image to a special background image.

  For example, the normal background image may be changed to a special background image either at the start of change or at the end of change in the change for executing the background change notice. In this case, for example, when it is determined other than “no execution” corresponding to not executing the pre-reading notice effect in the above-described step S710 (step S711; No), as shown in FIG. It is determined whether or not the notice pattern is SYP3-1 corresponding to the execution of the background change notice after the stop symbol notice (step S751). If the prefetch notice pattern is other than SYP3-1 (step S751; No), the process proceeds to step S712.

  If the pre-reading notice pattern is SYP3-1 (step S751; Yes), the change timing of the background image in the background change notice (second change in the prefetch notice pattern SYP3-1) is either at the start of change or at the end of change. It is determined whether or not to perform (step S752). By adopting the start of change or the end of change as the change timing of the background image, the difference in change timing becomes clear to the player, and an effect that is easy to understand for the player can be executed.

  In the process of step S752, the change timing is determined at a different rate depending on whether the variation category to be subjected to the pre-reading notice effect is “non-reach lose”, “reach lose”, “accuracy / small hit”, or “big hit” To do. For example, in the process of step S752, the change timing may be determined at the determination ratio shown in FIG.

  In the process of step S752, the change timing is determined at a different rate depending on whether the variation category to be subjected to the pre-reading notice effect is “non-reach lose”, “reach lose”, “accuracy / small hit”, or “big hit” To do. For example, in the process of step S752, the change timing may be determined at the determination ratio shown in FIG.

  After determining the change timing of the background image in step S752, the process proceeds to step S712. In this modification, a pattern as shown in FIG. 58 is provided as the prefetch notice effect control pattern of the prefetch notice pattern SYP3-1 according to the change timing. Then, in the process of step S712, according to the determination result in step S752, the pre-reading notice effect control pattern SCP4-1-1 (when the change timing starts to change with the number of reserved memories 3), SCP4-1-2 (the number of reserved memories). 3 when the change timing ends at the end of change), SCP4-2-1 (when the change timing starts when the number of pending storages is 4), or SCP4-2-2 (when the change timing ends when the change ends when the number of held memories is 4) Should be set.

DESCRIPTION OF SYMBOLS 1 Pachinko machine 4A 1st special symbol display device 4B 2nd special symbol display device 9 Production display device 13 1st start winning port 14 2nd starting winning port 103 CPU
120 CPU for effect control
151A First special figure storage unit 151B Second special figure storage unit

Claims (1)

A gaming machine that performs variable display and can be controlled to an advantageous state advantageous to the player,
Hold storage means capable of storing variable display that has not yet been started as hold information;
Determining means for determining whether to control to the advantageous state;
A determination unit that determines whether or not to be controlled to the advantageous state before determination by the determination unit;
Based on the determination by the determination unit, a notice effect for notifying that the variable state is controlled to the advantageous state in a plurality of variable displays before the variable display based on the hold information stored in the hold storage unit is executed. Notice execution execution means capable of executing,
Success / failure effect execution means capable of executing a success / failure effect on whether or not to be controlled to the advantageous state;
With
The notice effect executing means executes a first pattern for executing the first notice effect and a second notice effect having a higher ratio of being controlled to the advantageous state than the first notice effect in the variable display of the plurality of times. The notice effect can be executed by any one of the second pattern and the third pattern that executes the second notice effect after executing the first notice effect,
The gaming machine according to claim 3, wherein the proportion of execution of the notice effect varies according to the third pattern.

Images